JP2022043821A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that increases the fun of the opportunity to start a second game state.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: start means capable of starting a second game state, when the number of times a special game is determined not to be won reaches a predetermined specific number of times, in which an acquisition condition is easier to be satisfied than a first game state thereafter; and image display means capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shield image that shields the background image to make it difficult to see, according to the progress of the game. The image display means makes the first background image difficult to see by the shield image according to a fact that the number of times the special game is determined not to be won reaches the predetermined specific number of times, and then displays the second background image visually by hiding the shield image. At the start of the second game state, a start notification image for notifying a player of the start of the second game state can be displayed at any time before or after the display of the shield image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of starting a second gaming state in which the acquisition condition is easily satisfied from the first gaming state.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which determination information used for determining whether or not a special game (for example, a big hit game) is successful is acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and the determination information is determined when the determination condition is satisfied. In the above gaming machines, there are cases where a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which acquisition conditions are more easily established than in the first gaming state are provided (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-300731

An object of the present invention is to improve the fun of the opportunity for the second gaming state to start.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines whether or not a special game is appropriate based on the acquisition means for acquiring the determination information when the acquisition condition is satisfied and the determination information when the determination condition is satisfied. A determination means, and a start means capable of starting a second game state in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state after the number of times the special game is determined to be non-winning reaches a predetermined specific number of times. An image display means capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shield image that shields the background image to make it difficult to see according to the progress of the game is provided, and the background image is displayed in the first game state. The image display means includes the first background image to be displayed and the second background image to be displayed in the second gaming state, and the number of times the image display means is determined to be non-winning in the special game reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Accordingly, the first background image is made difficult to see by the shielded image, and then the second background image is displayed visually by hiding the shielded image, and the second gaming state is started at the start of the second gaming state. It is possible to display the start notification image for notifying the start of the image at any time before or after the display of the shield image.

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started after the number of times of determination, which is the number of times that the special game is determined not to be won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, the fun of the opportunity to start the second gaming state is improved as compared with the configuration in which the second gaming state is not started by the trigger. Further, according to the shielded image of the present invention, there is an advantage that it is possible to emphasize that the first gaming state has ended (the second time-saving gaming state has started).

According to the present invention, the fun of the opportunity to start the second gaming state is improved.

It is a front view which showed an example of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view which showed an example of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of a base display. It is a functional block diagram of an image control board. It is a figure which showed an example of a big hit determination table and a hit determination table. It is a figure which showed an example of the symbol determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a table scenario. It is another figure for demonstrating an example of a table scenario. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in each period. It is a figure for demonstrating another concrete example of the variation pattern determination table in each period. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of a deferred notification image and the remaining number of times image. It is a figure for demonstrating the display period of the deferred notification image and the remaining number image. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each screen at the start of the 2nd time shortening game state. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of each screen in a time-saving game state. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of the display period of a start image. It is a figure for demonstrating another specific example of the display period of a start image. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the update time of the number of the remaining number image. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of each screen when a power-off occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating another specific example of each screen when a power-off occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure for notifying the activation period. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of the display period of a left-handed image. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure for notifying the fact that it is possible to shift to the 2nd time shortening game state. It is a figure which showed an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the input control process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the 1st start port detection switch input process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the pre-determination process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the special figure special electric control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the special symbol memory determination processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop time processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the process of the transition determination process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart of the general power processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the command analysis process 1 by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the command analysis process 2 by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the effect input control process by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of the main processing by a host CPU. It is a flowchart of an interrupt process by a host CPU. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation effect pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the end effect in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the execution time of the end effect in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the big hit determination table and the hit determination table in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the symbol determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the preliminary determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the pre-determination process by a main CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop time processing by the main CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the transition determination process by the main CPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a simulated diagram of each screen in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the restriction period in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating another specific example of the variation time of the signal display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example in which the time saving game state in a 3rd Embodiment overlaps operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example at the time of ending the time saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each image displayed in the time saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the right-handed start image and the left-handed start image in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the result image in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the counting period in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating 1st information and 2nd information in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display period of the image at the start in the modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to the embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Composition of gaming machines>
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back surface side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of a gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Further, a glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3. Further, a game board 10 having a board surface on which the game ball is launched is mounted on the inner frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a through which the game ball can move (flow down) is formed between the board surface of the game board 10 described above and the transparent plate 4b on the front side thereof. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism portion 5 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the gaming machine), and the other end side in the left-right direction (for example, with the hinge mechanism portion 5 as a fulcrum). The right side facing the gaming machine) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism portion 5 as a fulcrum to open the inner portion of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10. can.

On the other end side of the glass frame 4 (for example, on the right side facing the gaming machine), a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided. The lock by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door opening switch 136 (see FIG. 3) for detecting whether or not the glass frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2.

At the lower part of the glass frame 4 (lower portion of the window 4a), a plate unit 7 having a storage plate 6 (upper plate 6a and lower plate 6b) for storing game balls is provided. Further, the plate unit 7 has an effect button 8 that can be pressed and operated by the player, a cross key 40 that allows the player to execute various selection operations, and a game ball stored in the lower plate 6b to the outside of the game machine. It is equipped with a discharge button 9 for discharging.

As shown in FIG. 1, the effect button 8 is provided in the central portion of the dish unit 7. The effect button 8 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to move forward and backward over a normal operation position, a pressing position that is retracted below the normal operation position, and a protruding operation position that protrudes upward from the normal operation position. To. In the specific example of FIG. 1, the effect button 8 at the normal operation position is shown.

The effect button 8 is configured to be able to be pressed from an arbitrary position including a normal operation position and a protrusion operation position to a pressing position. In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As will be described in detail later, an operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (the operation of the effect button 8 becomes effective) is provided. The effect button 8 is provided with an effect button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4), and when the effect button detection switch 8a detects a player's operation, a predetermined effect is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button. Further, the cross key 40 is provided with a cross key detection switch (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switch (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) includes an upper button detection switch 40a for detecting the operation of the upper button, a lower button detection switch 40b for detecting the operation of the lower button, and an operation of the left button among the cross keys 40. The left button detection switch 40c for detecting the operation of the right button and the right button detection switch 40d for detecting the operation of the right button (see FIG. 3) are included.

As shown in FIG. 1, an operation handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. The operation handle 11 is provided with a touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4). When the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 11, a touch signal is transmitted to the launch control board 160.

Upon receiving the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, the launch control board 160 permits the firing solenoid 12a to be energized. When the rotation angle of the operation handle 11 changes, the gear directly connected to the operation handle 11 rotates, and the knob of the firing volume 11b (see FIG. 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detection angle of the firing volume 11b is applied to the firing solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball firing mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the launching solenoid 12a, the launching solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves to the game area 10a of the game board 10 with the strength according to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11. Be fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game board 10 (game area 10a). The outer rail R1 and the inner rail R2 guide the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls in the game area 10a. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 10a, and the game ball falls unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10. The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 including a liquid crystal display device and the like, and an effect movable body 32. The effect movable body 32 can move to the retracted position and the appearance position, and usually stops at the retracted position. A specific example of FIG. 1 shows a case where the effect movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The effect movable body 32 may overlap with the image displayed by the image display device 31 in front view. Further, the effect movable body 32 is configured to include a light emitting body. The effect movable body 32 emits light by the light emitting body.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first starting port 13 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10a on the lower center side of the center member 12. Further, a second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13. When the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14, the game is started.

The opening / closing door 14b is provided at the second starting port 14. The opening / closing door 14b is movably controlled into a first aspect in which the opening / closing door 14b is maintained in the closed state and a second aspect in which the opening / closing door 14b is in the open state. According to the above-mentioned second starting port 14, the game ball is difficult to win (including the case where it is practically impossible) in the first aspect, and the game ball is easy to win in the second aspect (first starting port). It will be easier to win from 13.).

The second starting port 14 (opening / closing door 14b) of the present embodiment is configured so that the game ball cannot enter during the period controlled by the first aspect. However, if the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first aspect is easier for the game ball to enter than the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second aspect, the period in which the game ball is controlled in the first aspect is set. The configuration may be such that the game ball can enter the second starting port 14.

The game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 13 is detected by the first starting port detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). Further, the game ball that has won a prize in the second start opening 14 is detected by the second start opening detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When the game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when the game balls are detected by the second start port detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 13 and the second start port 14, three game balls are commonly paid out, but the number of payouts is different for each start port. You may. For example, the number of payouts of the first starting port 13 may be three, and the number of payouts of the second starting port 14 may be one.

When the first start port detection switch 13a or the second start port detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery for acquiring the right to execute a big hit game described later (hereinafter referred to as "big hit lottery") is executed. The big hit game of the present embodiment includes a long hit game and a short hit game. The long-hit game is composed of 10 rounds, and in each round, the big winning opening is opened for the time when the game ball can win (for example, 30 seconds). However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. In addition, the short hit game is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the large winning opening is opened for the time when the game ball can be won. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls win the big prize opening. A predetermined time interval is provided between each round. In the small hit game, the big winning opening is opened for the time when the game ball can win (for example, 1.8 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 1, a gate 15 through which a game ball can pass is provided in the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball, a lottery of ordinary symbols described later is executed.

The game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “right side area”) is provided with a first large winning opening 16 and a second large winning opening 17 into which a game ball can enter. A game ball can enter the above right area when the operation handle 11 is rotated more than a predetermined angle (so-called "right-handed"). On the other hand, when the operation handle 11 is rotated smaller than the angle (so-called "left-handed"), the game ball does not enter the right side region. That is, in the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17 provided in the right side area, a game ball can be won when the game is played right-handed, and a game ball is played when the game is played left-handed. It is configured not to win a prize.

In the present embodiment, when the game is left-handed, the game ball can be won in the first starting port 13, but it is difficult (including the case where it is practically impossible) to win the game ball in the second starting port 14. The configuration is adopted. Further, when the game is played with a right-handed hit, the game ball can win a prize in the second starting opening 14, but the game ball is difficult to win in the first starting opening 13 (including the case where it is practically impossible). Will be done.

The first large winning opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by the opening / closing door 16b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the big hit game, the opening / closing door 16b is opened, and the opening / closing door 16b functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball into the first big winning opening 16, so that the game ball can win the first big winning opening 16. .. The first big winning opening 16a is provided with the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, and when the first big winning opening detection switch 16a detects a game ball, a preset number (for example, 15) of prize balls is paid out. Will be done.

The second large winning opening 17 is normally maintained in a closed state by the movable piece 17b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the big hit game, the movable piece 17b operates to open the second big winning opening 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a taxiway to guide the game ball into the second big winning opening 17, and the game ball becomes a taxiway. It is possible to enter the second large winning opening 17. The second big winning opening 17a is provided with a second big winning opening detection switch 17a, and when the second big winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a preset number of prizes (for example, 15) is awarded. The ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general winning openings 18 are provided in the game area 10a. When a game ball wins in each of the above general winning openings 18, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out. Further, at the bottom of the game area 10a, none of the general winning opening 18, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, the first large winning opening 16 and the second major winning opening 17 entered the ball. An out port 19 for discharging the game ball is provided.

The image display device 31 is controlled by the effect control board 120 (image control board 150) described later and displays various images. For example, during the non-game period when the game is not executed, the moving image of the demonstration is displayed on the image display device 31. Further, the image display device 31 variablely displays three effect symbols GA (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for notifying the lottery result of the big hit during the game period in which the game is executed. The effect symbol GA is scrolled from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 31 (variable display), then displayed so as to swing in the image display device 31 (temporary stop), and is stopped by the symbol confirmation command. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the combination of specific effect symbol GAs (for example, 777, etc.) is stopped and displayed to notify that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit. In addition, the combination other than the specific effect symbol 38 (for example, 289 or the like) is stopped and displayed to notify that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss.

The image display device 31 displays the fourth symbol in addition to the effect symbol GA. The fourth symbol is an image showing the fluctuation state of the effect symbol GA used for notifying the lottery result of the big hit lottery. However, a display lamp indicating the fluctuation state of the effect symbol GA may be separately provided so that the fourth symbol is not displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of left and right effect lamps 33 are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 4. The effect lamp 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of the light are changed according to each effect.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with a voice output device 34 (see FIG. 4) composed of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effect). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs the BGM corresponding to the image displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided on the lower left side of the game area 10a. The main display 28 described above is controlled by the main control board 110 described later. Further, the main display 28 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24, and a normal symbol. Includes a hold indicator 25 and a round count indicator 26.

The first special symbol display device 20 notifies the result of a big hit lottery when a game ball enters the first starting port 13, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbol (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery on the first special symbol display device 20, the lottery result is a game. Will be notified. The above special symbols are stopped and displayed after being displayed (blinking) for a predetermined time.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the big hit lottery when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (first special symbol display device). Same as 21). Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbol (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery on the second special symbol display device 21, the lottery result is a game. Will be notified. The special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and displayed after being displayed (blinks) for a predetermined time, similarly to the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the ordinary symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15. Although the details will be described later, when the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as “general pattern lottery”) is won, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. To. The normal symbol display device 22 described above is displayed (blinks) for a predetermined time when the game ball passes through the gate 15, and then stopped and displayed.

If the game ball enters the first start port 13 or the second start port 14 and the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately during the variable display of the special symbol or in the big hit game, the right of the big hit lottery is reserved under certain conditions. Will be done. For example, the right of the big hit lottery in which the game ball enters the first starting port 13 and is reserved is reserved as the first hold, and the right of the big hit lottery in which the game ball enters and is reserved in the second starting opening 14. Is reserved as a second hold.

The first special symbol hold display 23 displays the current value of the number of first hold. The first hold of the present embodiment is held up to four. In addition, the second special symbol hold indicator 24 displays the current value of the number of second hold. Similar to the first hold, the second hold of the present embodiment is held up to four. Further, in the present embodiment, when both the first hold and the second hold are stored, the second hold is preferentially digested. That is, the second special symbol display device 21 has priority over the first special symbol display device 20 and is displayed in a variable manner.

If the normal symbol lottery cannot be performed immediately during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the period when the second starting port 14 (opening / closing door 14b) is in the second mode (opening), the right of the normal symbol lottery is reserved. The upper limit number of reservations for the regular drawing lottery is set to 4, and the reserved number for the regular drawing lottery is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 25. In addition, the general drawing lottery is also executed in the big hit game (non-time saving game state). The round number display 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of the round game performed during the big hit (special game).

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, and a game information output terminal board 27 are provided. The power supply board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Structure of game control device>
FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of the game in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150, and a launch control board 160 in addition to the above-mentioned main control board 110, effect control board 120, payout control board 130, and power supply board 170. do.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 and performs arithmetic processing based on an input signal from each detection switch (first start port detection switch 13a or the like). Various commands are transmitted from the output port to other boards according to the result of the above arithmetic processing. Further, the main CPU 111 controls each display including the above-mentioned main display 28. The main RAM 113 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 111.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the input side of the main control board 110, there are a first start port detection switch 13a, a second start port detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a first big winning opening detection switch 16a, and a second big winning. The mouth detection switch 17a, the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected, and a game ball detection signal is input from the above detection switches.

For example, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 16 is detected by the first prize opening detection switch 16a. Further, the game ball detected by the first special winning opening detection switch 16a is subsequently detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, the game ball that has won the second prize opening 17 is detected by the second prize opening detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 18 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball launched into the game area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as “out number”.

As shown in FIG. 3, a signal from the clear switch 30a is input to the main control board 110. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 during the period when the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). Further, the clear switch 30a outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 during the period when the clear button 30 is not operated.

The above clear button 30 cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is closed. That is, the clear button 30 is provided at a position that the player cannot operate. For example, the clear button 30 is operated by the administrator of the gaming machine 1. When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1 while the clear button 30 is operated, various information of the main RAM 113 is initialized.

The main control board 110 includes a start opening opening / closing solenoid that opens / closes the opening / closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14, a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid that opens / closes the opening / closing door 16b of the first winning opening 16, and a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. The second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid that opens / closes the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is connected.

The main control board 110 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24, and a normal symbol hold. The display 25 and the round count display 26 are connected. The main control board 110 outputs an external information signal necessary for managing a gaming machine in a hall computer or the like of a gaming store to a gaming information output terminal board 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, a right-handed lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110. The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on in a period in which it is more advantageous to play right-handed than left-handed, and is turned off in a period in which it is more advantageous to play left-handed than right-handed. For example, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up in the short-time game state, the big hit game, and the small hit game. In the above configuration, when the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on, the player plays the game by right-handed. Therefore, the right-handed lamp 28 is also paraphrased as a means for instructing the operation mode (left-handed, right-handed) of the operation handle 11.

The main ROM 112 stores a game control program described later and data necessary for various games. Further, the main RAM 113 has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 has a normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and a determination storage area. , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game count (X) storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) storage area, game state storage area, game state buffer , A stop symbol data storage area, an effect transmission data storage area, and the like are provided. The game state storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high-probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a normal figure general electric processing data storage area. The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 27 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store. Further, a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism is connected to the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base display 114 is provided on the main control board 110. The base display 114 of the present embodiment displays the base value described later. The base display 114 is configured to include four segment displays (see FIG. 4 below) and is mounted directly on the main control board 110.

The power supply board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Further, the power supply board 170 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. Specifically, when the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal reaches a low level, the main CPU 111 enters an operation stop state.

In the present embodiment, the power supply board 170 is provided with a backup power supply including a capacitor. With the above backup power supply, the data stored in the main RAM 113 is maintained even when the operation is stopped. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery. Further, a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The effect control board 120 controls each effect. As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 121, a sub ROM 122, a sub RAM 123, and an RTC (real time clock) 124. The effect control board 120 described above is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 110 so as to be communicable.

The sub CPU 121 reads and calculates the program stored in the sub ROM 122 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140. Execute the process. Further, the sub CPU 121 transmits the corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the above-mentioned arithmetic processing. The sub RAM 123 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 121.

The sub ROM 122 stores a program for controlling the effect and data necessary for various games. For example, a variation effect pattern determination table for determining an effect pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and an effect symbol pattern determination table for determining a combination of effect symbol GA to be stopped and displayed (not shown). ) Etc. are stored in the sub ROM 122. In addition, a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are stored in the sub ROM 122.

The sub RAM 123 has a plurality of storage areas. Specifically, the sub RAM 123 includes a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first hold storage area, and the like. A second reserved storage area and the like are provided.

RTC124 outputs the current time. The RTC 124 of the present embodiment operates by the power supply during the period when the gaming machine is supplied with power from the outside. On the other hand, during the period when the gaming machine is not supplied with power from the outside, it operates by the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170. The RTC 124 described above can measure the current date and time even during a period in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside.

A date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time are received from the RTC 124 by the sub CPU 121, and various processes according to the current date and time are executed. A battery may be provided on the effect control board 120 so that the RTC 124 can be operated by the battery.

The payout control board 130 executes launch control of the game ball and payout control of the prize ball. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132, and a payout RAM 133, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 110 so as to be communicable. Further, signals from the payout ball counting switch 135, the door opening switch 136, the dish full tank detection switch 51, and the ball jam detection switch 52 are input to the payout control board 130.

The payout ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out. The plate full tank detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the storage plate (lower plate) of the game ball is full. Further, the ball jam detection switch 52 is, for example, a switch for detecting the jam of the game ball in the passage where the game ball to be paid out moves.

The payout CPU 131 reads the program stored in the payout ROM 132 and performs arithmetic processing based on the input signals from the various switches described above, and transmits data according to the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the storage portion of the game balls to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to pay out a predetermined prize ball to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131.

In this embodiment, it is monitored whether or not a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, it is permitted to launch the game ball on the launch control board 160. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, it is prohibited to launch the game ball on the launch control board 160.

When the launch control board 160 receives the launch control data from the payout control board 130, the launch control board 160 permits the launch. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the firing volume 11b are read out, the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feed solenoid 12b are energized and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The firing solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A launching member (not shown) is directly connected to the launching solenoid 12a, and the launching member rotates when the launching solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid.

The rotation speed of the firing solenoid 12a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. With the above configuration, the number of launching game balls in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds. The ball feed solenoid 12b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and feeds the game balls on the upper plate 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launch solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, an effect button detection switch 8a and a cross key detection switch (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 140. The detection signal from each of the above detection switches is input to the effect control board 120 via the lamp control board 140.

Further, the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 provided on the game board 10 are connected to the lamp control board 140. The lamp control board 140 controls the lighting of the effect lamp 33 and the drive control for the motor for changing the light irradiation direction based on the data transmitted from the effect control board 120. In addition, a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect movable body 32 is energized and controlled. In this embodiment, since the effect button 8 is configured to protrude, the effect movable body 32 includes the effect button 8.

The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 are connected to the output side thereof.

<Base display>
4 (a) to 4 (c) are diagrams for explaining the control of the base display 114 in the present embodiment. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to each gaming state including a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low-probability non-time saving gaming state. The base value B of a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in the section by the above-mentioned number of outs (total number of game balls launched).

FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining various counters (a prize ball counter for base calculation, an out counter for base calculation, and a total out counter) used for display control of the base display 114. Each of the above counters is provided in, for example, the main RAM 113.

The prize ball counter for base calculation counts the prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, a numerical value "10" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 18. Further, when the game ball wins in the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Similarly, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14, the numerical value "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Further, the out counter for base calculation counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, a numerical value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B in a specific section by multiplying the calculation result obtained by dividing the value of the prize ball counter for base calculation by the value of the out counter for base calculation by the value "100". However, the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are not added except in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is calculated in the specific section. In the present embodiment, the period in which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are added may be described as a "counting period", and a period other than the counting period may be described as a "non-counting period". ..

The main CPU 111 stores (saves) the base value B of the section every time the predetermined section ends. In this embodiment, the base value B is stored every time the number of outs is counted by 60,000. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs in the period from the first power-on to the present (hereinafter, may be referred to as "total outs"). Each time the numerical value "60,000" is added to the total out counter, the main CPU 111 calculates and stores the base value B from the current values of the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter. Further, every time the numerical value "60,000" is added to the total out counter, the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized.

FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. In the specific example of FIG. 4B, the number of outs of 60,000 is counted in the section 3, then the number of outs of 60,000 is counted in the section 2, the number of outs of 60,000 is counted in the section 1, and the number of outs is counted in the section L. Is started. The number of outs in the section L is less than 60,000 (0 to 59999). Further, the base value B in the section 3 is "B3", the base value B in the section 2 is "B2", the base value B in the section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in the section L is "BL". ”.

In the above specific example, in the section L, the base value BL of the section L (real time), the base value B1 of the section 1 (previous section), the base value B2 of the section 2 (the section two times before), and the section. The base value B3 of 3 (the section three times before) is displayed on the base display 114. Specifically, the base display 114 switches and displays four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B of each section is displayed by switching, for example, about every 5 seconds. In the present embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114, including the period during which the game is possible.

When one section ends (when the number of outs of 60,000 is counted), the base value B of the section is saved as the base value B of the previous section, and the base value B of the oldest section is discarded. .. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, when the number of outs in the section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL in the section L is stored as the base value B1 in the section 1, and the base value B1 in the section 1 is stored in the section 2. Is stored as the base value B2 of, the base value B2 of the section 2 is stored as the base value B3 of the section 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest section 3 is discarded.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in FIG. 4C, the base display 114 includes a first display unit 114x and a second display unit 114y. The second display unit 114y is composed of two seven-segment displays and displays the base value B. In the second display unit 114y described above, the numbers "00" to the numbers "99" can be displayed. If the base value is larger than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed on the second display unit 114y (the dot display unit lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches the base value B of the section in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3 every 5 seconds and displays it on the second display unit 114y. The first display unit 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that can identify which section of the base value B is displayed on the second display unit 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B described above, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period in which the base value BL of the section L is displayed. Further, in the period in which the base value B1 of the section 1 is displayed, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x, and in the period in which the base value B2 of the section 2 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is the first. The identification information "b3" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period displayed on the 1 display unit 114x and the base value B3 of the section 3 is displayed.

However, when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value to be displayed on the second display unit 114y cannot be calculated during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. Similarly, when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value displayed as the identification information "b2" and the base value displayed as the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. In consideration of the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, each identification information is blinked and displayed during the period when the identification information "b1" to the identification information "b3" are displayed on the first display unit 114x. , The special symbol "---" is lit and displayed on the second display unit 114y.

When the total number of outs is 60,000 or more and less than 120,000, the base value B1 to be displayed as the identification information "b1" is calculated, but the base value B2 to be displayed as the identification information "b2" and the identification information "b3" are displayed. The base value B3 to be calculated cannot be calculated. In consideration of the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 60,000 or more and less than 120,000, the identification information is lit and displayed and the base value is displayed during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. During the period in which B1 is lit and displayed and the identification information "b2" or the identification information "b3" is displayed, each identification information is blinked and displayed, and the special symbol "---" is lit and displayed on the second display unit 114y.

Similarly, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more and less than 180,000, the base value B1 displayed as the identification information "b1" and the base value B2 displayed as the identification information "b2" are calculated, but the identification information "b3" is calculated. The base value B3 to be displayed cannot be calculated. In consideration of the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more and less than 180,000, the identification information is displayed during the period when the identification information "b1" or the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. During the period in which the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is blinking and the special symbol "---" is displayed on the second display unit 114y. Lights up and displays.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period when the identification information “bL” is displayed. However, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, for example, if the number of normal outs in the section L is not sufficiently large, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is notified whether or not the number of normal outs in the section L is sufficiently large. According to the above configuration, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 has an advantage that the base value BL can be evaluated after considering whether or not the number of outs is usually sufficient.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the number of normal outs in the section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is blinked and displayed, and when the number of normal outs in the section L is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL" is displayed. Is lit and displayed. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified whether or not the number of normal outs in the section L is sufficiently large, and the above-mentioned advantages can be obtained.

By the way, it is usual that the operation of the gaming machine 1 is confirmed before the player actually plays the game. The above operation confirmation includes confirmation of whether or not the detection switch (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) normally detects the game ball. Therefore, in a configuration in which the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are added immediately after the power is first turned on to the gaming machine 1, the calculation is made immediately after the power is first turned on for the gaming machine 1. It is assumed that the base value to be played is different from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "300"). Adopted. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

<Setting change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a is turned on when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and is turned off when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. Any of a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of different ball output rates can be set in the gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1 while the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position and the clear button 30 is pressed, the setting change process described later is executed and the setting is performed. Shift to a mode in which the value can be changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting change mode"). When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the current setting value stored (set) in the main RAM 113 is displayed on the base display 114. Further, the set value displayed on the base display 114 is switched in the order of "... 1->2->3->4->5->6-> 1 ..." each time the clear button 30 is pressed in the setting change mode. .. When the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of games N indicating the number of remaining games until the second time-shortened game state, which will be described later, is initialized to an initial value (value "800" in the case of this embodiment). The remaining number of times N is also initialized in the clear operation processing described later. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on while the clear button 30 is pressed.

<Structure of image control board>
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the image control board 150. As shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 to control the image display of the image display device 31. It is composed.

The host CPU 151 gives an instruction to the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on the effect pattern designation command described later received from the effect control board 120. The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151. When each of the above signals is received, the host CPU 151 appropriately executes an interrupt process. The image data of the image displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154.

The host CPU 151 gives an instruction to the VDP 200 to output a predetermined sound to the audio output device 34 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120. The host RAM 152 is built in the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated by the arithmetic processing of the host CPU 151. Further, the host RAM 152 temporarily stores the data read from the host ROM 153.

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM and stores a control processing program of the host CPU 151. Further, the host ROM 153 has a symbol arrangement information in which the symbol number of the effect symbol and the type of the effect symbol GA are associated with each other, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of the effect pattern, and the like. Memorize animation scene information.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and the combination of the animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like are specified. In addition, the animation scene information includes information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and the like. Is done.

The CGROM 154 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). .. The combination of the color number information that specifies the color number of each pixel and the α value indicating the transparency is specified from the pixel information.

Further, the CGROM 154 stores the palette data in which the display color information and the color number information used when actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only a part of the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Further, various voice data are stored in the CGROM 154.

The crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 200. The clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155, and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 to control and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31.

The VRAM 156 is a storage device capable of writing and reading image data, and is composed of, for example, an SRAM. For example, palette data is stored in the above VRAM 156.

Further, the VRAM 156 has a display list storage area 156a for temporarily storing the display list output from the host CPU 151, an expanded storage area 156b for storing the image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206, and an image is drawn or displayed. A first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d are provided for this purpose. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (display frame buffer) in response to an instruction from the host CPU 151. Further, the VDP 200 generates a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the read image data and outputs it to the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of the present embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F202, a CPUI / F203, a clock generation circuit 205, an extension circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, and a display circuit 208. , A memory controller 209 and a voice control circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are executed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The host CPU 151 writes and reads data to and from the control register 201 via the CPUI / F203.

Specifically, the control register 201 is a system control register that makes basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register that makes settings necessary for data transfer, and drawing control. A drawing register to make settings, a bus interface register to make settings necessary for bus access, an extension register to make settings necessary for decompressing compressed images, and a display register to make settings to control the display. including.

The CG bus I / F202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 154. Image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP200 via the above CG bus I / F202.

The CPUI / F203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151. For example, the display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPUI / F203. Further, various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPUI / F203. The host CPU 151 can access the control register via the CPUI / F203.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 performs data transfer between the host CPU 151 and VRAM 156, data transfer between CGROM 154 and VRAM 156, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of VRAM 156.

The clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock of the VDP 200. Further, a clock for generating a synchronization signal is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control by a display list composed of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 156. The video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31.

Further, the display circuit 208 outputs a synchronization signal (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 to the image display device 31. In the present embodiment, the RGB signal obtained by converting the digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display device 31 as the video signal, but the video signal may be output as the digital signal.

When the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 to switch the frame buffer, the memory controller 209 switches between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”.

The VDP 200 of the present embodiment has an audio data reproduction function in addition to an image data reproduction function. Specifically, the voice output in the gaming machine is controlled by the voice control circuit 300 of the VDP 200. The voice control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 120, and controls the voice output in the voice output device 34.

The voice control circuit 300 outputs voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 154. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the audio data is stored in the CGROM 154, the sound source ROM in which the audio data is stored may be provided separately from the CGROM 154. Further, the voice control circuit 300 is not included in the VDP 200 and may be independently provided in the image control board 150. In the above case, the sound source ROM may be included in the voice control circuit 300.

<Explanation of game status>
Next, the gaming state in which the gaming machine 1 shifts will be described. In the present embodiment, the game progresses in any of the "low-probability gaming state", "high-probability gaming state", "time-saving gaming state", and "non-time-saving gaming state". Specifically, a gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and is a "short-time gaming state", a gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and is a "non-short-time gaming state", and a "high-probability gaming state". It shifts to a gaming state that is a "state" and a "short-time gaming state".

In the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state, the jackpot winning probability becomes 1 / 299.5 in the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13 or the second starting opening 14. Winning a big hit means acquiring the right to perform a big hit game. The jackpot game includes a "long hit game" and a "short hit game" described later.

In the above-mentioned high-probability gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than that in the low-probability gaming state. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state of this embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit is 1 / 29.95. However, the winning probability of the big hit in each game state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability is 1/20 in the general drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the time length from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol display device 22) to the stop display is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, when winning in the general drawing lottery, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when the long opening symbol described later is determined is about 4.2 seconds, and the second starting opening when the short opening symbol is determined. The total opening time of 14 is set to about 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning a win in the general drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the time length from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the stop display is shorter than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 tends to be longer. ..

Specifically, in the short-time game state, the winning probability in the general drawing lottery is 19/20. Further, in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed about 1 second after the variable display. Further, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when the long opening symbol is determined is set to 5 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when the short opening symbol is determined. Is set to 3 seconds. When the normal symbol is stopped, the normal symbol is maintained in the stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving game state, the second starting port 14 is more likely to be controlled in the second mode as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15 as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15. Therefore, in the short-time game state, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball. In the present embodiment, by playing right-handed, a game ball can be won in the second starting port 14 and the gate 15. Therefore, in the short-time game state, it is more advantageous to play right-handed than left-handed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the present embodiment includes the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. The first short-time game state is entered when the big hit game (ending period) ends. In the second short-time gaming state, it becomes possible to shift to the jackpot non-winning number of times predetermined in the jackpot lottery (big hit determination process) in the low-probability gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is common to each time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in each time-saving game state is about 1 second. In addition, the winning probability of the regular drawing lottery is common in each time-saving game state, and the probability that the long-open symbol is determined and the probability that the short-open symbol is determined are common in each time-short game state.

In each time-saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, opening number of times) of the opening / closing door 14b when the long opening symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Further, in each time-saving game state, the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b when the short-opening symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the "variable time of the normal symbol, the opening (expansion) time of the second starting port 14 and the number of times of opening" in the time-saving gaming state are referred to as the second starting port 14 (opening / closing door 14b) in the time-saving gaming state. May be described as "open mode". As described above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different in each time-saving gaming state.

Each of the above time-saving game states ends when a predetermined number of games are executed or when the game shifts to a big hit game. Hereinafter, the number of games in which the time-saving game state ends may be described as the "time-saving number of times" in the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is different for each time reduction game state. Specifically, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state is 100 times or 799 times. The number of time reductions in the second time reduction game state is 1000 times. However, the number of time reductions in the time reduction game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of time reductions in the second time reduction game state may be 100 times (common to the first time reduction game state).

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be described.

<Big hit judgment table>
6 (a-1) and 6 (a-2) are examples of the jackpot determination table referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of the special symbol change is a jackpot (during the jackpot lottery). It is a conceptual diagram.

FIG. 6A-1 is a jackpot determination table referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is A. Details will be described later using FIGS. 7 (a-1) to 7 (a-3), but when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery, the big hit symbol (special symbol A or the like) described later is displayed. If the small hit is won, the small hit symbol (special symbol K) is displayed.

FIG. 6 (b-2) is a jackpot determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities for small hits and the same jackpot probability. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 20 may be simply described as "first special figure", and the second special symbol display device 21 may be simply described as "second special figure". Further, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be collectively referred to simply as "special symbols".

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "starting port"), a random value for special symbol determination is acquired. The random number range of the special symbol determination random number value of the present embodiment is a numerical value "0 to 598".

In the big hit determination table, a random value for special symbol determination that becomes a "big hit" and a random value for special symbol determination that becomes a "small hit" are defined. In the big hit lottery, the special symbol judgment random value acquired when the game ball wins at the start opening is compared with the special symbol judgment random value specified in the big hit judgment table, and if both match, the big hit or Win a small hit.

The jackpot determination table (A, B) shown in FIGS. 6 (a-1) and 6 (a-2) is composed of a low-probability random number determination table and a high-probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the gaming state, selects the low-probability random number determination table in the low-probability gaming state, and selects the high-probability random number determination table in the high-probability gaming state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines any of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted special symbol determination random value.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 6 (a-1), the two special symbol determination random number values are determined to be "big hits". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". Further, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6A-1, four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hits" regardless of whether the low probability random number determination table is used or the high probability random number determination table is used. Is determined. Temporarily, a random value that is neither determined as "big hit" nor "small hit" is determined to be "missing".

As described above, the random number range of the random number value for special symbol determination is the numerical value "0 to 598". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table A (at the time of winning the first start opening), the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is 1 / 299.5 in the low probability gaming state. Similarly, the probability of being determined as a big hit in a high-probability gaming state is multiplied by 10 to 1 / 29.95. On the other hand, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 1 / 149.75 in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state.

In the jackpot determination table B shown in FIG. 6A-2, the random value for special symbol determination, which is determined to be a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, is the same as the jackpot determination table A. On the other hand, the big hit determination table A and the big hit determination table B differ in the random value for special symbol determination determined to be a small hit. For example, in the big hit determination table B, it is determined as "small hit" only when the random value for special symbol determination is "50".

In the above configuration, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability gaming state is 1/299 when the game ball wins in the first start opening 13 and when the game ball wins in the second start opening 14. It is 5, and the probability of being determined as a big hit in a high probability gaming state is 1 / 29.95. On the other hand, the probability that a small hit is determined when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13 is 1 / 149.75 in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, but the second starting port 14 has a probability of being determined as a small hit. The probability that a small hit will be determined when a game ball wins is 1/599 in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 6B is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not a stop result of a normal symbol change is a hit in a normal map lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6B is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above-mentioned random number determination table in the time-saving game state is commonly referred to in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a normal symbol determination random number when the game ball passes through the gate 15. The random number range of the random number value for hit determination is a numerical value "0 to 19". The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, selects the random number determination table in the non-time-saving game state in the non-time-saving game state, and selects the random number determination table in the time-saving game state in the time-saving game state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines whether the table is "hit" or "missing" based on the selected table and the acquired random value for hit determination.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the acquired hit determination random number value and the hit determination random number value defined in the hit determination table match. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6B, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is about 1/20, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving gaming state is about 19/20.

<Design determination table>
7 (a-1) to 7 (a-3) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a lost symbol determination table. The jackpot symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (big hit symbol) when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. The small hit symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (small hit symbol) when a small hit is won in the big hit lottery. The loss symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (loss symbol) in the case of loss in the big hit lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (a-1) to 7 (a-3), each special symbol determination table is provided for each special symbol display device, and is a special symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device 20 and a second. It is composed of a special symbol determination table for the special symbol display device 21.

FIG. 7A-1 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a jackpot symbol determination table. When the big hit is won, the main CPU 111 refers to the random value for the big hit symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the jackpot symbol is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, when a big hit is won with the winning of the first starting port 13, the main CPU 111 is set to "01" (stop symbol data) if the acquired random number value for the big hit symbol is "0" to "59". Determine the special symbol A1). In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7 (a-1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

Further, the main CPU 111 generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify the stop symbol data (type of the special symbol) at the start of the change of the special symbol. For example, when the stop symbol data "01" is determined, the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated as shown in FIG. 7 (a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7 (a-1), if the jackpot is won with the winning of the first starting port 13 and the acquired random number value for the jackpot symbol is "60" to "69", the game is stopped. "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as the symbol data, and the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

Similarly, if the jackpot is won with the winning of the first start port 13 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "99", the stop symbol data is "03" (special symbol A3). Is determined, and the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

If the jackpot is won with the winning of the second starting port 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "0" to "69", "04" (special symbol B1) is determined as the stop symbol data. , The effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "01H" are generated. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7 (a-1), the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Further, if the jackpot is won with the winning of the second starting port 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "89", "05" (special symbol B2) is used as the stop symbol data. It is determined, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. If the jackpot is won with the winning of the second start port 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "90" to "94", "06" (special symbol B3) is determined as the stop symbol data. , The effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Similarly, if the jackpot is won with the winning of the second starting port 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "95" to "99", the stop symbol data is "07" (special symbol B4). Is determined, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. As will be described in detail later, the time reduction number M in the first time reduction game state after the big hit game changes according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed when the big hit game is started.

When the above special symbol A1, special symbol A2, special symbol A3, special symbol B1 to special symbol B4 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "big hit symbol") are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is started thereafter. .. As described above, the jackpot game includes a long hit game and a short hit game. In the big hit game, the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17 (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "big winning opening") are opened. In the long-hit game, the opening time of the large winning opening is set longer than in the short-hit game.

The type of the jackpot game corresponds to the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. Specifically, when any one of the special symbol A1, the special symbol A3, and the special symbol B1 to the special symbol B4 among the big hit special symbols is stopped and displayed, the long hit game is started. On the other hand, when the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, the short hit game is started.

In addition, the game state after the big hit game is completed is determined according to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the game shifts to the big hit game. For example, when the special symbol A1, the special symbol A2, or the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state of the high-probability gaming state (hereinafter, simply referred to as “high-probability time-saving gaming state”). In principle, the short-time gaming state of the high-probability gaming state continues until the jackpot is won. On the other hand, when any one of the special symbol A3, the special symbol B2, and the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state (hereinafter, simply referred to as "low-probability time-saving gaming state"). Specifically, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed from the special symbol A3 and the special symbol B2, and when the big hit game is completed, the game shifts to the first time-shortening game state.

In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state differs depending on the type of the jackpot symbols (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state becomes 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of games in the first time-shortened game state becomes 799 times.

As will be described in detail later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (described later) of the special figure is switched according to the number of games. The above table scenario S is variably set according to the type of the jackpot symbol.

In the present embodiment, a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is a high-probability gaming state may be described as "probability variation jackpot", and a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is a low-probability gaming state may be described as "normal jackpot". .. Further, in the present embodiment, the non-time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state may be described as "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state".

FIG. 7A-2 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small hit symbol determination table. When the small hit is won, the main CPU 111 refers to the random value for the small hit symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the small hit symbol is a numerical value "0 to 99". However, when a small hit is won with the winning of the first starting port 13, the main CPU 111 determines "11" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the acquired random number value for the small hit symbol. do. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7A-2, the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, when a small hit is won with the winning of the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 selects "12" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the acquired random number value for the small hit symbol. decide. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7A-2, the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. In addition, the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "0AH" are generated.

FIG. 7 (a-3) is a conceptual diagram of a lost symbol determination table. If it is determined that there is a loss in the big hit lottery at the time of winning the first starting port 13, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, in the big hit lottery at the time of winning the second starting port 14, if it is determined that there is a loss, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

7 (b-1) and 7 (b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol determination table is commonly used in each gaming state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state).

The ordinary symbol determination table of the present embodiment includes the ordinary symbol determination table X and the ordinary symbol determination table Y. The ordinary symbol determination table X is used when a winner is selected by a regular drawing lottery (when the second starting port 14 is opened). On the other hand, the normal symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the ordinary drawing lottery (when the second starting port 14 is not opened).

FIG. 7 (b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the ordinary symbol determination table X. The main CPU 111 acquires a random value for a normal symbol when determining a normal symbol. The random number range of the random number value for ordinary symbols is a numerical value "0 to 10". For example, if the character is won by lottery and the random value for the normal symbol is the numerical value "0" or the numerical value "1", the long open symbol is determined as the ordinary symbol. On the other hand, when the random number value for the normal symbol is any of the numerical values "2 to 10", the short open symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the long open symbol is determined as the normal symbol, the main CPU 111 determines the stop symbol data "01" and generates the ordinary symbol designation commands "E8H" and "01H" at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. When the short open symbol is determined, the stop symbol data "02" is determined, and the normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "02H" are generated at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

FIG. 7 (b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the ordinary symbol determination table Y. As described above, the ordinary symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the ordinary pattern lottery. In the case of a loss in the ordinary drawing lottery, as shown in FIG. 7 (b-2), the lost symbol is determined regardless of the random value for the normal symbol of "0" to "10". When the lost symbol is determined as the normal symbol, the main CPU 111 determines "00" as the stop symbol data, and generates the ordinary symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

8 (a), 8 (b-1) and 8 (b-2) are diagrams for explaining the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game. The variation pattern determination table is referred to when determining the variation pattern in each game. The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern in each game, and displays the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) in the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the big hit game is completed is variable according to the type of the big hit symbol stopped and displayed at the start of the big hit game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of table scenarios S corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets a table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Further, the main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the big hit game by using the set table scenario S. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. Although the details will be described later, when the number of games after the big hit game ends reaches the number of games specified in the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8 (b-1) described later).

FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. The table scenario S includes a table scenario Sa1, a table scenario Sa2, a table scenario Sa3, a table scenario Sb1, a table scenario Sb2, a table scenario Sb3, and a table scenario Sb4. The table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the table scenario SB1 is set. It is set when the special symbol B1 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-shortening game state of 100 times after the big hit game. That is, the table scenario Sb2 is set when shifting to the first time-shortening game state of 100 times after the big hit game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-shortening game state of 799 times after the big hit game. Further, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-shortening game state of 799 times after the big hit game.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state after the big hit game is the same (799 times) between the case where the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and the case where the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the set table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is different. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in the first time saving game state is different between the case where the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and the case where the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. In the games in which the effect modes are different, the effects that can be executed by the image display device 31 are different.

In the present embodiment, the fact that the specific variation pattern determination table T is referred to in the variation pattern determination process may be simply described as "the variation pattern determination table T is referred to". Further, the fact that a specific variation pattern determination table T can be referred to among a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables T may be simply described as "the variation pattern determination table T is set". For example, as an example of "the specific variation pattern determination table T can be referred to", it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table T is read from the main ROM 112 and stored (expanded) in the main RAM 113.

FIG. 8B-1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table set by the table scenario S. The table scenario S defines a plurality of triggers for setting (switching) the fluctuation pattern determination table and the fluctuation pattern determination table set at the triggers. When the opportunity specified in the table scenario S is established, the main CPU 111 sets (switches) the fluctuation pattern determination table.

FIG. 8B-1 shows the order in which the opportunity for setting the fluctuation pattern determination table is established. In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table set at the trigger is shown corresponding to the trigger. In the specific example of FIG. 8 (b-1), it is assumed that the table scenario Sb2 is set in the table scenario S. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 8 (b-1), it is assumed that the big hit game is not won in the period from the setting of the table scenario Sb2 to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is set at the end of the big hit game. Further, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is set when the 91st game after the jackpot game ends is started. After that, when the 100th game after the big hit game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the 90th game (90th game after the big hit game is completed) out of the 1st time-saving game state (100 times), and the 91st to 99th times are referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the games up to, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set at the end of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, when the 791th game starts after the big hit game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, among each game in the non-time saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to up to the game 11 times before the transition to the second time saving game state, and 10 times before the transition to the second time saving game state. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the game of.

When the second short game state starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8 (b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern is determined when the 802nd game (the second game in the second time-shortening game state) starts after the big hit game ends. The table Tax is set. Further, when the second short game state is completed, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game in the second time-shortening game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the second and subsequent games in the second time-shortening gaming state. After that, when the second short game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. As understood from the above description, in the period in which the table scenario S is set, the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of games from the big hit game in addition to the opportunity for the game state to change.

In the present embodiment, the table scenario S is changed when the jackpot game is won, and is not changed by other triggers. However, when the above-mentioned clear operation process or setting change process is executed, the table scenario S becomes unset. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, an operation in which a setting change process or a clear operation process is executed may be described as a “clear operation”. Further, a period in which the table scenario S is not set may be referred to as a “scenario unset period”. The scenario unset period is the period from the execution of the clear operation to the end of the first jackpot game. Further, the period in which any of the table scenarios S is set after the big hit game is completed may be referred to as a "scenario setting period".

It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of games during the scenario unset period. Further, in the inverse proportion, the variation pattern determination table that is advantageous to the player is referred to from the start of the scenario unset period to the predetermined number of games. In the above inverse proportion, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can shift to a state advantageous to the player at any timing by the clearing operation. Therefore, there may be an inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table is not changed according to the number of games during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 8 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the scenario unset period. In the specific example of FIG. 8 (b-2), it is assumed that the big hit game is not won in the period from the start of the scenario unset period to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-2), immediately after the clear operation is executed and the scenario unset period is started, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. When the clear operation is executed, it becomes a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Further, when the game is executed 800 times after the clear operation is executed, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state changes from the variation pattern determination table Tn1 to the variation pattern determination table Tn2 according to the number of games. Change. On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving game state in the scenario unset period, the reference variation pattern determination table T does not change from the variation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-2), the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set when the second short game state is started in the scenario unset period. After that, when the second time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the fluctuation pattern determination table is not changed (according only to the number of games) except when the game state changes during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each gaming state. In the present embodiment, when each game is started, a fluctuation pattern designation command indicating a fluctuation pattern of the game is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The sub CPU 121 is controlled to the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. FIG. 9 shows each effect mode corresponding to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, and the variation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time for which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner may differ depending on the variable pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner in each game is variable. In the present embodiment, for the sake of explanation, in the period in which the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, the average of the time during which the special figure is variablely displayed in each game when the game is played in a normal procedure is the "special figure" in the period. "Average fluctuation time of" may be described. FIG. 9 shows the average fluctuation time (short, long, fixed) of the special figure in the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referred to, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table T. The above-mentioned "playing in a normal procedure" means hitting left during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off, and hitting right during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on, so-called "stop hitting" (single hitting). Including) means not to do.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table Ta1, the variation pattern determination table Ta2, the variation pattern determination table Tj1, the variation pattern determination table Tj2, and the variation pattern determination table Tax can be referred to. However, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the first time-saving game state changes according to the table scenario S (that is, changes according to the jackpot symbol).

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the first time-shortening game state of 100 times is started. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as described with reference to FIG. 8 (b-1) above, the 90th game (the 90th game after the big hit game is completed). ), The variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st to the 99th games, and the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the effect mode is the time saving mode A. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, the effect mode becomes the time saving mode A as in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced. That is, in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the effect mode in the first to 99th games does not change, but when the remaining number of times reaches 10, the fluctuation pattern determination table T switches (Ta1 →). Ta2). However, the effect mode may be different between the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced. In the above configuration, the effect mode is switched when the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set reaches 10.

The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is easier to determine the variation pattern for a long time as compared with the variation pattern determination table Ta1. In the above configuration, in the game after the remaining number of times of the first time-shortened game state is 10, for example, an effect (for example, a countdown effect) for notifying (suggesting) that the first time-shortened game state ends is executed. It will be easier to secure time for this. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the end effect is executed after the judge effect is executed.

In the judge effect, for example, the shield image GF (see FIG. 16 (c) above) is displayed first. That is, when the judge effect is started, the sliding doors in the closed state are displayed. Further, in the judge effect, it is displayed that the sliding door can be opened by repeatedly hitting the effect button 8, and that the first short game state continues when the sliding door is opened. Assuming that, in the judge effect when the first short game state continues, the moving image in which the sliding door opens is finally displayed (the shield image GF is hidden). On the other hand, in the judge production when the first short game state does not continue, the sliding doors remain closed. In the end effect, it is notified that the first short game state is finished. A specific example of the end effect will be described in the second embodiment described later (see FIG. 45).

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the end of the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 8 (b-1) above). In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, the effect mode becomes the normal mode. Further, when the 791th game starts after the big hit game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to, the effect mode is the immediately preceding mode. In the last-minute mode, an effect that is not performed in the normal mode can be executed. For example, in the immediately preceding mode, an effect suggesting that the second short-time gaming state is about to start is executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ts is set when the second time-saving gaming state starts. The variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the inrush effect is executed. The rush effect is an effect for notifying that the second short game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special figure in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the second and subsequent games (game in which Tax is referred to) in the second time-shortening game state. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a predetermined variation pattern is determined for each result of the big hit lottery. For example, when the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the time required to stop and display the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss after executing the judge effect and the end effect is determined. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won, it is notified that the jackpot has been won after the judge effect and the end effect are executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the second to 1000th (last) games in the second time-saving game state. In the variation pattern determination table Tax, it is easy to determine a variation pattern shorter than the non-time saving game state (game in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referred to). Further, in the variation pattern determination table Tax, a variation pattern shorter than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is easily determined, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. Similarly, in the variation pattern determination table Tbx, a variation pattern shorter than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-shortening gaming state is easily determined, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the effect mode is set to the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1, the variation pattern determination table Ta2, the variation pattern determination table Tj2, the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, and the variation pattern determination table Tax. The variation pattern determination table T referred to in the order of is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 (a) described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 (b) described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tn1 and the variation pattern determination table Tbx is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the scenario unset period will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 (b) described later.

FIG. 10A-1 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set in the table scenario S. In FIG. 10 (a-1), in addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table T at each time point, the effect mode at each time point, the remaining number of times of the time saving game state (hereinafter, “remaining number of times M”), and the second time saving game state are shown. The remaining number of times until the start (hereinafter, "remaining number of times N") is shown. The remaining number M and the remaining number N are stored in, for example, the main RAM 113.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is subtracted by the numerical value "1", and when the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the time-saving game state ends. Further, in each game in the low probability gaming state, the remaining number of times N is subtracted by the numerical value "1", and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time saving gaming state is started. The remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800" when the jackpot game is won and the above-mentioned clearing operation is triggered. That is, when 800 games (low-probability game state) are executed from the big hit game and 800 games (low-probability game state) are executed from the clear operation, the second short-time game state starts. Will be done.

FIG. 10A-1 shows the start time point ts of the game and the end time point te of the game. As can be seen from FIG. 10 (a-1), the remaining number M of the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game. Specifically, the remaining number M is subtracted at the end of the fixed period described later. Similarly, the remaining number N is subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the 90th game in the first time-shortening game state. That is, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-shortened game state is the numerical value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "711". Further, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st to the 99th games in the first time-saving game state. Both the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time saving mode A (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the time saving mode A is set from the first game to the 99th game in the first time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 10 (a-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the final game of the first time-saving game state, and the process ends after the above-mentioned judge effect is executed. The production is executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 10 (a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted from the numerical value "0" at the time point ta, and the first time-saving gaming state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number N is subtracted to the numerical value "700" at the time point ta. As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first short game state ends, and the effect mode becomes the normal mode.

FIG. 10A-2 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game in another period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of FIG. 10 (a-2), it is assumed that the first time-saving gaming state ends at the time point ta, as in the specific example of FIG. 10 (a-1) described above. As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving gaming state ends, and after that, when the game is executed 690 times, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 Is set. That is, after the big hit game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the 791th game. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the immediately preceding mode (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, after the big hit game, the mode is changed from the 791th game to the immediately preceding mode.

In the specific example of FIG. 10A-2, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value “0” at the time point tb and the second time-shortening gaming state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is set to the numerical value "1000" at the time point tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10A-2, it is assumed that the number of holdings is one or more at the time point tb, and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-shortened game state. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and the rush effect is executed. Further, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, and the effect mode becomes the time-saving mode B.

FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the scenario unset period. As described above, the scenario unset period is started with the clear operation as an opportunity. When the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low-probability non-time-saving game state is set. Further, when the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times N until the second short game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". As shown in FIG. 10B, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, and the other variation pattern determination tables T are not referenced.

In the specific example of FIG. 10B, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value “0” at the time point tb and the second time-saving gaming state is started. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10 (b), similarly to the above-mentioned FIG. 10 (a-1), the number of holdings is one or more at the start time tb of the second time-shortened gaming state, and the number immediately after the time point tb is the second. It is assumed that the two-hour short game state starts. When the second short game state is started in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to until the end of the second time-saving gaming state. The variation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time saving mode B (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the effect mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B regardless of whether the scenario is set or the scenario is not set.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the variation referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-saving game state in the period in which the scenario is not set. The pattern determination table T is different. Specifically, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the dedicated fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, whereas in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period. In the first game of, the variation pattern determination table Tbx, which is also referred to in the subsequent games, is referred to.

In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to and a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to are more likely to determine a longer variation pattern. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, various effects (rush effect, mode selection effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started are executed. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a variation pattern having a length at which the above effects can be performed is determined.

On the other hand, in the first game in the second time-shortening game state in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be selected than in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referenced. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first game in the second time-shortening game state in the scenario unset period is, in principle, shorter than the time during which the rush effect or the like is executed in the game to which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced.

From the above circumstances, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period, in principle, all of the rushing effects etc. executed in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are performed. Cannot be executed. However, as will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b) described later, in the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period, the first game in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set An effect that omits a part of various effects (mode selection effect) executed in the first game in the two-time shortened game state is executed.

FIG. 11A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is set in the games up to the 90th time, as in the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. It is referred to, and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the 91st to 99th games.

However, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to in the 100th game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to, the continuous effect is executed after the judge effect is executed. In the continuous production, it is notified that the first short game state will continue. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the production mode in the game up to the 100th time is set. It is common. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the first time-saving game state continues to the 101st and subsequent games until the continuation effect is executed (. (Including cases where it is practically impossible).

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the effect mode is the time saving mode B.

When 800 games are executed in the low-probability gaming state (non-time saving, time saving), the game shifts to the second time saving gaming state. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state of 799 times is completed, the second time-saving game state is started through one game of the non-time-saving low-probability gaming state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game executed between the first time-saving game state (799 times) and the second time-saving game state may be referred to as a "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to, the effect mode is set to the time saving mode B as in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced.

In the specific example of FIG. 11A, it is assumed that the second time-shortening gaming state is started at the time point tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 11A, it is assumed that the number of holds is the numerical value “1” or more at the time point tb. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax including the first game and the second and subsequent games is referred to, and the effect mode is the time-saving. Mode B. Further, in the second time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, various effects (rush effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted. ..

As can be understood from the above explanation, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second time-saving game state starts through the gap game after shifting to the time-saving mode B in the first time-saving game state (799 times). Over the series of games after that, the production mode becomes the time saving mode B. With the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are a series of time-saving gaming states. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it may be configured to notify that the first time-saving game state has ended (the gap game has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

FIG. 11B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. The table scenario Sb4 is set when the first time-shortening game state of 799 times is started, as in the case where the table scenario Sb3 is set (see FIG. 11 (a) above).

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to from the first game to the last game in the first time saving game state (799 times), and the effect mode is the time saving. Mode B is set. That is, in the period in which the above-mentioned table scenario Sb3 is set, the time saving mode B is entered after the continuous effect is executed in the game (100th game) in the middle of the first time saving game state (799 times), but the table. During the period in which the scenario Sb4 is set, the game shifts from the first game in the first time-saving game state to the time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is substantially notified that the first time-saving gaming state continues 799 times immediately after the first time-saving gaming state starts.

As shown in FIG. 11B, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, and the second time-saving game state thereafter. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. Further, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the effect mode is the time reduction mode over a series of games of the first time reduction game state, the gap game, and the second time reduction game state, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. Become B.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. be able to. In the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the rush effect is not executed at the start of the second short game state, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, a specific game (for example, the first game) in the second time-saving game state (Tax or Ts is referred to in the first game) started in the scenario setting period. And the specific variation display in the second time-saving gaming state (Tbx is referred to in the first game) started in the scenario unset period, the reference variation pattern determination table T is variable.

12 and 13 (a) to 13 (c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the present embodiment, for each special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21), a random value for special symbol determination (winning or losing of a big hit) and a random value for a big hit symbol (big hit). The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the symbol), the number of special symbol reservations, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value. The numbers in the column of "number of reservations" in FIGS. 12 and 13 (a) to 13 (c) mean the number of reservations of the special figure corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 111 generates a fluctuation pattern designation command capable of specifying the determined fluctuation pattern. The above variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 in the output control process.

12 and 13 (a) to 13 (c) show effects (reach and the like) executed by the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. The "reach" in the present embodiment means that after a part of the combination of the effect symbol GAs for notifying the transition to the special game (big hit game) is stopped and displayed, the remaining part of the effect symbol GA is displayed in a variable manner. Means a continuous state. For example, it is assumed that a combination of three effect symbols GA of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbol GAs for notifying the transition to a big hit game. In the above case, the state in which the two effect symbol GAs are stopped and displayed at "7" and the remaining effect symbol GAs are displayed in a variable manner is "reach".

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern designation command of the present embodiment is configured to include a first message indicating MODE and a second message indicating DATA. The first message (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is "E6H". On the other hand, the first message (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is "E7H". The second telegram (DATA) of the variation pattern specification command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time saving game state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. As described above, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, any one of the variation pattern determination table Tn1, the variation pattern determination table Tn2, and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the variation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above variation pattern determination tables. The "variation time" shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 (a) to 13 (c) described later means the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special figure to the end of the fixed period.

In the variation pattern determination table Tn1, variation patterns a (1x to 3x), variation patterns b (1x to 6x), and variation patterns are used as variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. Any of c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, and variation pattern g is determined.

The main CPU 111 responds to the type of the special symbol display device, the type of the special symbol (combination of the random value for the special symbol determination and the random value for the symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random value for the reach determination, and the random value for the special symbol variation. To determine one of the fluctuation patterns. The reach determination random number value has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is acquired before the fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, the random number value for special symbol variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is acquired before the variation pattern is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in the variable pattern in which the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. However, the reach effect may not be executed in the variable pattern in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random value is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 12 shows an effect executed by an effect executing means such as an image display device 31 when the special symbol display device is variedly displayed in each variation pattern. For example, in the fluctuation pattern a (1x to 3x), the "normal reach effect" is executed. The above-mentioned "normal reach effect" is a reach effect in which the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol fluctuates, and the expectation of the big hit winning is relatively low.

In the fluctuation pattern b (x1 to x6), the "SP reach effect" is executed. The above-mentioned "SP reach effect" is a reach effect in which the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, similar to the above-mentioned normal reach effect. However, in the SP reach effect, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal reach effect is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that the winning of the big hit will be notified (the same three effect symbols GA will be displayed) than the normal reach effect.

In the fluctuation pattern c (x1 to x6), the "SPSP reach effect" is executed. The above-mentioned "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect in which the left symbol and the right symbol of the effect symbol GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, like the other reach effects. However, in the SPSP reach effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other reach effects is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SPSP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot winning will be notified thereafter than the SP reach effect.

In the present embodiment, in the game in which the SP reach effect is executed, the normal reach effect is executed before the SP reach effect. That is, it develops from a normal reach production to an SP reach production. Further, in a game in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, the normal reach effect is developed to the SP reach effect, and the SP reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect. However, there may be a case where the normal reach effect directly develops into the SPSP reach effect.

For example, it is assumed that the special symbol A1 (big hit) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the random number value for special symbol fluctuation is any one of the numerical values "0 to 3", the fluctuation pattern a1x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 40,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern a1x, the normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the effect of notifying the probability variation jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15", the variation pattern b1x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "16 to 34", the variation pattern b2x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "35 to 65", the fluctuation pattern c1x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "66 to 98", the fluctuation pattern c1x is determined. If the pattern c2x is determined and the random value for special symbol variation is the numerical value "99", the variation pattern g is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 60,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern b1x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation jackpot is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 70,000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c1x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation jackpot is notified. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 80,000 ms, the full rotation reach effect is executed by the image display device 31, and the probability variation jackpot is notified.

When the special symbol A2 (short hit probability variation) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the random value for special symbol variation. In the above fluctuation pattern dx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 20000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern dx, the short hit effect is executed in the image display device 31. The above short hit effect is an effect of notifying that a small hit or a short hit (probability variable big hit) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol A3 (normal big hit) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the fluctuation pattern a2x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 40,000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a2x, the normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the effect of notifying the normal big hit is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15", the variation pattern b3x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any one of the numerical values "16 to 34", the fluctuation pattern b4x is determined, and if the random value value for special symbol fluctuation is any one of the numerical values "35 to 65", the fluctuation pattern b4x is determined. The pattern c3x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "66 to 99", the variation pattern c4x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 60,000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b3x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a big hit is usually notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 70,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern c3x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

When the special symbol K (small hit) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the special symbol A2 (probability variation short hit) is stopped and displayed regardless of the random value for special symbol fluctuation. The variation pattern dx is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern is determined according to the combination of the first special symbol hold number, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation random value. Is determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above case, if the reach determination random value is “0 to 69”, the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern ex is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 3000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern ex, an effect of notifying the loss is executed after the normal effect (normal variation) is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbol reservations is "0 to 2" and the reach determination random number value is "70 to 99", the reach effect corresponding to the special symbol variation random value value is executed. Specifically, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the fluctuation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", the fluctuation pattern b5x is determined. The pattern b6x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the fluctuation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", the fluctuation pattern c5x is determined. The pattern c6x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 35,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern a3x, the normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 55,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern b5x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 55,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 65,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern c5x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 65,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the loss is notified.

Further, it is assumed that the number of first special symbols held is "3" when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed. In the above case, if the reach determination random number value is "0 to 89", the reach effect is not executed, and the variation pattern fx is determined regardless of the special symbol variation random value. In the above fluctuation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 2000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern fx, an effect of notifying the loss is executed after the normal effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbol reservations is "3" and the reach determination random number value is "90 to 99", the reach effect corresponding to the special symbol variation random value value is executed. Specifically, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the fluctuation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", the fluctuation pattern b5x is determined. The pattern b6x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the fluctuation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random value for special symbol fluctuation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", the fluctuation pattern c5x is determined. The pattern c6x is determined. Although detailed description will be omitted, the variation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 in the non-time saving gaming state is determined by the same method as the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Variation pattern determination table for time-saving game state>
13 (a) to 13 (c) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state), the variation pattern determination table Ta1, the variation pattern determination table Ta2, the variation pattern determination table Tj1, the variation pattern determination table Tj2, and the variation pattern determination table. Any of Tax, variation pattern determination table Ts, and variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to.

FIG. 13A is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax. The variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, for example, in the second time-saving game state started (via the jackpot game) in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, any one of the variation patterns J1a to the variation pattern J1n is determined by lottery. In the above games, the fluctuation patterns of the second special figure are "immediate hit effect (probability change big hit, normal big hit)", "direct alignment effect (probability change big hit, normal big hit)", "7 symbol reach (probability change big hit)", " It is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern (J1a to J1k) in which "short fluctuation (loss)", "directly aligned gassing effect (loss)", and "reach fanning (loss)" are executed. Further, in the above games, a variation pattern (J1l to J1n) in which "special 1 hit (probability variation big hit, normal big hit)" and "special 1 loss (loss)" are executed is determined as the variation pattern of the first special figure. obtain. However, in the time-saving game state, since the game is played by right-handed and the second special figure fluctuates, the fluctuation pattern J1k is usually determined from the fluctuation pattern J1a.

The immediate hit effect is an effect in which the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special figure to the notification of the winning of the big hit is relatively short. For example, in the immediate hit effect, the effect symbol GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the big hit symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped) about 0.5 seconds after the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. In the immediate hit effect after the effect symbol GA is stopped (after about 0.5 seconds have elapsed), for example, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the special symbol B2 (normal symbol) corresponds to the special symbol B1 (probability variation symbol). The effect of being promoted to the effect pattern GA is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the jackpot symbol may be referred to as “big hit effect symbol GA”. In the above-mentioned immediate hit effect, the reach effect is not executed, and the variable display of the three symbol images is stopped at substantially the same time. The length of the immediate hit effect can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the immediate hit effect, the jackpot effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed about 0.5 seconds after the fluctuation of the special figure starts, and then the jackpot game starts after a fixed period of about 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to be.

Similar to the immediate hit effect, the direct alignment effect is an effect in which the big hit effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. However, the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the notification of the winning of the big hit game is longer than the immediate hit effect. For example, in the direct alignment effect, the jackpot effect symbol GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) about 15 seconds after the variable display of the special figure starts. The direct alignment effect is an effect in which the same effect as the direct alignment effect is executed halfway, and finally the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

The 7 symbol reach is an effect in which the effect symbol GA (a combination of 777 symbols) for the big hit corresponding to the probabilistic big hit is displayed. Specifically, in the 7 symbol reach, two effect symbol GAs representing the number "7" are temporarily stopped, the reach effect is executed, and then the jackpot effect symbol GA representing the symbol combination of "777" is displayed. To. For example, in the 7 symbol reach, the reach effect is executed about 20 seconds after the fluctuation of the special symbol starts (the probability variation jackpot is substantially notified), and then the jackpot effect symbol GA is displayed about 20 seconds later. To. As can be seen from FIG. 13A, the 7 symbol reach is the longest (about 50 seconds) of the variation patterns that can be determined in the game to which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced. The reach fanning is an effect in which the same effect as the 7 symbol reach is executed halfway, the reach effect is not finally executed, and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. According to the above reach fanning, it is possible to improve the expectation that the 7 symbol reach may be executed.

The short variation (loss) is an effect in which the reach effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the short fluctuation, the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed about 0.5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, and then the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The state is maintained. The long fluctuation (loss) is an effect in which the reach effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the long fluctuation, the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed about 3.5 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, and then the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The state is maintained.

As can be seen from FIG. 13A, the immediate hit effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in the game in which the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second short-time game state (a game in which Tax is referred to), the immediate hit effect is executed in most of the games (about 80%) won by the big hit. However, the probability that the immediate hit effect will be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be executed with a probability of about 1/10 when a probabilistic jackpot is won, and may be executed with a probability of about 1/2 when a normal jackpot is won. With the above configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation for the probabilistic jackpot when the direct alignment effect and the 7 symbol reach are executed, as compared with the case where the immediate hit effect is executed. That is, it is also said that the longer it takes for the jackpot effect symbol GA to be displayed, the higher the expectation for the probabilistic jackpot.

The above-mentioned immediate hit effect and direct alignment effect can be executed both at the time of winning the normal jackpot and at the time of winning the probabilistic jackpot. On the other hand, the 7 symbol reach can be executed only when the probability variation jackpot is won. In the above configuration, in the time saving mode B in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to (see FIG. 9 above), the probability variation jackpot is substantially notified when the reach effect is executed with the 7 symbols. Therefore, in the time saving mode B, it is possible to improve the fun of the effect (7 symbol reach, reach fan) in which the presence or absence of the execution of the reach effect is notified. However, in the game of the time saving mode B of the loss in the big hit lottery, the reach effect may be executed with 7 symbols.

FIG. 13B is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state started (without going through the jackpot game) in the scenario unset period. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the second time-shortening game state is different between the case of passing through the jackpot game and the case of not passing through, but the variation pattern determination table T is different in each of the above cases. May be common.

As shown in FIG. 13B, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, the variation pattern J2g can be determined from the variation pattern J2a. In the game in which the variation pattern J2a is determined, the above-mentioned immediate hit effect (probability variation big hit) is executed. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern J2b is determined, the above-mentioned immediate hit effect (normal big hit) is executed, and in the game in which the variation pattern J2c is determined, the above-mentioned short variation (loss) is executed, and the variation pattern J2d is generated. In the determined game, the above-mentioned long variation (loss) is executed, in the game in which the variation pattern J2e is determined, the above-mentioned immediate hit effect (probability variation jackpot) is executed, and in the game in which the variation pattern J2f is determined, the above-mentioned immediate hit effect (probability variation jackpot) is executed. In the game in which the above-mentioned immediate hit effect (normal big hit) is executed and the fluctuation pattern J2g is determined, the above-mentioned special 1 loss (loss) is executed.

As can be understood from the above description, the 7 symbol reach executed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced is not executed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced. Further, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is also referred to in the first time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 9 above). It is also said that the above configuration is variable in the fluctuation pattern that can be determined between the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 13C is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1. The variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to from the 1st to 90th games in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 or the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referred to is the time saving mode A, and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to is the time saving mode B. Therefore, as can be seen from FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c), a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to (time saving mode A) and a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to ( The effect that can be executed differs between the time saving mode B). Specifically, of the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B, the effect executed in one of the effect modes is not executed in the other effect mode. However, an effect that is commonly executed in both the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B may be provided. That is, although the effects executed in each effect mode are different in principle, a specific effect may be configured to be executed in common in each effect mode. Further, the effects executed in the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B may all be common. Further, although the effects executed in each effect mode are common in principle, a specific effect may be configured to be executed in only one effect mode.

In the present embodiment, in each game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time of the period during which the effect symbol GA is variablely displayed (the period during which the symbol image is scrolled and displayed) (hereinafter, simply "average variation of the effect symbol GA"). The time ”) is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA in each game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced and the average variation time of the effect symbol GA in each game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced. That is, the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA is shorter in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Further, the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA in the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average variation time of the effect symbol GA in each game in which the other variation pattern determination table T is referenced. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA may be shorter in the first time-shortening game state than in the second time-shortening game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA is the game in which the big hit is won in the second short game state from the game in which the big hit is won in the first short game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Is shorter. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the effect symbol GA may be shorter in the game in which the jackpot is won in the first time-shortening game state than in the game in which the jackpot is won in the second time-shortening game state. ..

As described above, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by the numerical value "1" in each game, and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time saving game state is started. The remaining number of times N is maintained by the backup power supply even when the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to defer the remaining number of times N on the previous day at the start of business of the game hall where the game machine 1 is installed. However, if the clear operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining number N is initialized.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which whether or not the remaining number of times N before the power is turned off is deferred is concealed immediately after the start of the game, and then can be notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the player can be given the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred in the period immediately after the start of the game. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14A is a simulated view of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. Specifically, FIG. 14A is a simulated view of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. In each game, the image display device 31 includes the effect symbol GA (x, y, w), the reserved image GB (x, y), the fourth symbol GC (1, 2), the reserved number image GD (1, 2), and the reserved image GB (1, 2). Display various images including small pattern Ga.

The effect symbol GA is variablely displayed during the period when the special symbol display device (20, 21) is variablely displayed, and is stopped and displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect symbol GA stops and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the special symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The specific example of FIG. 14A assumes a case where the lost symbol (special symbol H) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. In the above case, for example, the effect symbol GA stops and displays the symbol combination "782".

Further, the effect symbol GA stops and displays the symbol combination (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot symbol when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. Similarly, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the effect symbol GA stops and displays the symbol combination (for example, "757") corresponding to the small hit symbol. The effect symbol GA includes the effect symbol GAx (see FIG. 14 (a)), the effect symbol GAy (see FIG. 17 (b)), and the effect symbol GAw. The effect symbol GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. Further, the effect symbol GAy is displayed in the time reduction mode A, and the effect symbol GAw is displayed in the time reduction mode B.

The fourth symbol GC shows the fluctuation state of the special symbol display device (20, 21). Specifically, during the period when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed in the first color (for example, white). On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variablely displayed, the fourth symbol GC is variably displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variablely displayed, the fourth symbol GC is alternately displayed in the first color and the second color (for example, red).

The fourth symbol GC includes the fourth symbol GC1 and the fourth symbol GC2. The fourth symbol GC1 shows the variation mode of the first special symbol display device 20, and the fourth symbol GC2 shows the variation mode of the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the fourth symbol GC1 is variably displayed during the period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed, and is stopped and displayed during the period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the fourth symbol GC2 is variably displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed, and is stopped and displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed. Specifically, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC, which differs depending on the gaming state, is displayed. Further, in the big hit game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The hold number image GD (1, 2) displays the hold number (first hold number, second hold number). Specifically, the hold number image GD includes the hold number image GD1 and the hold number image GD2. Hold number The image GD1 displays the first hold number. Further, the hold number image GD2 displays the second hold number. In the specific example of FIG. 14A, it is assumed that the first holding number is 4 and the second holding number is 0.

The hold number image GD of the present embodiment is common to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as in the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, a common hold number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common hold number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different pending number image GDs are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the big hit game, the hold number image GD may be displayed.

Similar to the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga is composed of three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol). Further, the small symbol Ga is variablely displayed during the period when the special symbol display device (20, 21) is variablely displayed, and is stopped and displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect symbol GA may be temporarily hidden depending on the effect to be executed. Even in the above cases, the small symbol Ga is continuously displayed in principle.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit symbol. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the small hit symbol. Similarly, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the lost symbol. Further, in principle, the small symbol Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol GA when the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed. For example, when a big hit is won and the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed at "7,7,7", the small symbol Ga is also stopped and displayed at "7,7,7", and the small hit is won and the effect symbol is displayed. When GA stops and displays at "7.5.7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays at "7.5.7".

In the present embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, a common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the big hit game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display. In addition to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. 1 The display mode may be different from that of the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

In the present embodiment, a background image GH that differs for each effect mode is displayed. For example, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, a background image GHx (an example of a first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14A). However, the background image GH may be common in all or part of each effect mode. The reserved image GB includes a reserved image GBx (see FIG. 14 (a)), a reserved image GBy (see FIG. 17 (b)) and a reserved image GBw (see FIG. 17 (a)). The reserved image GBx stores the above-mentioned random value (hereinafter, may be referred to as "determination information") in the first special symbol reserved storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. It is displayed when it is done. Specifically, a plurality of reserved images GBx corresponding to each determination information stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area are displayed. The reserved image GBy is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area in the time saving mode A. The reserved image GBw is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area in the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the game count image GE is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. The game count image GE displays the number of games in a low-probability gaming state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the game count image GE (“550” in the specific example of FIG. 14 (a)) is added up to “800”, the low-probability non-time-saving game state is subsequently changed to the second time-saving game state. It will be possible. The above configuration has an advantage that it is easy for the player to grasp the number of games until the transition to the second time-saving game state.

However, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then the power is supplied (when the power is turned off / on), the number of games image GE is a number regardless of the numerical value of the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113. "0" is displayed. That is, when the power is turned off / on while the remaining number N is subtracted from the initial value "800", the remaining number N is not the initial value, but the game number image GE displays the number "0". In the above case, before the game number image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted from the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started. On the other hand, if the clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is initialized. In the above case, in the game in which the game number image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted from the number "0", and the second time saving game state is started.

As understood from the above explanation, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred (whether or not there is a clear operation) in the period immediately after the power is turned off / on. Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned off / on, the number of games up to the second time-shortened game state cannot be specified from the game count image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred in the period immediately after the start of the game.

FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a specific example of the stationary notification image GI. The deferred notification image GI is displayed on condition that the remaining number of times N is deferred before and after the power is turned off / on. Further, the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in FIG. 14 (a) above in the game at a specific number of times after the power is turned on. Specifically, the deferred notification image GI is the 51st game after the power is turned on (a game in which the number of the game count image GE is added to "50") or the 101st game after the power is turned on (game count image GE). The number of is displayed in the game) which is added to "100".

According to the above configuration, the deferred notification image GI notifies that the remaining number of times N is deferred. The number of the game count image GE is added at the end of the game (when the confirmation command is received). Therefore, it is also said that the upper deferred notification image GI is started to be displayed in a game in which the number of game count image GE is "50" at the start, or in a game in which the number of game count image GE is "100" at the start. To. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "a game in which the number of the game count image GE is" X "at the start" (a game in which the number of the game count image GE is added to "X + 1" at the end) is simply "game count image GE". The number may be described as "game of" X "".

Further, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on condition that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "200" or less in the game of the specific number of times. For example, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, when the remaining number N is the numerical value "200" or less, the deferred notification image GI is displayed in the game. On the other hand, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "200", the deferred notification image GI is not displayed in the game. However, even if the deferred notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number N is subtracted to the numerical value "200" or less in the 101st game after the power is turned on, 101 from the power on. The deferred notification image GI is displayed in the second game. It should be noted that the deferred notification image GI is displayed in a common manner regardless of whether the game is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on or the 101st game after the power is turned on.

Even in the 101st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "200", the deferred notification image GI is not displayed even if the remaining number of times N is deferred. Further, the stationary notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined time and then hidden (see FIG. 14 (d) described later). Further, when the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, it is not displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. It should be noted that a configuration in which a predetermined sound is output when the stationary notification image GI is displayed is preferable.

FIG. 14C is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining number of times image GN. The remaining number of times image GN displays the actual number of remaining games until the second time-shortened game state is started. That is, the remaining number of times image GN displays the current value of the remaining number of times N. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in FIG. 14A described above. In this embodiment, both the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN are displayed simultaneously (in parallel). However, in the period immediately after the power is turned on, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be concealed in the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number of times image GN is displayed from the game in which the above-mentioned stationary notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in the subsequent normal mode and immediately preceding mode games. However, as described above, the stationary notification image GI may never be displayed. In the above case, the remaining number of times image GN is started to be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. It should be noted that the remaining number of image GN may be temporarily hidden during the period in which the predetermined effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) is executed.

FIG. 14D is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period in which the deferred notification image GI is displayed and the period in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in the game in which the deferred notification image GI is displayed. .. In FIG. 14D, it is assumed that the game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed starts at the time point ts and ends at the time point te.

As shown in FIG. 14D, the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the game is started, and is hidden at a predetermined time. Further, almost at the same time that the stationary notification image GI is hidden, the remaining number of times image GN is started to be displayed. The remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed in the subsequent game, and is hidden after the second time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the stationary notification image GI is displayed prior to the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, after notifying that the remaining number of times N is deferred by the deferred notification image GI, the actual remaining number of times N is notified by the remaining number of times image GN.

It is assumed that the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in advance of the deferred notification image GI in inverse proportion. Whether or not the number image N is deferred can be grasped from the actual number of games since the power is turned on (the number displayed by the game number image GE) and the number displayed by the remaining number image GN. For example, in the 101st game after the power is turned on, when the remaining number image GN displays a number other than the number "700", it is grasped that the remaining number N is deferred. Therefore, in the above-mentioned inverse proportion, since it is substantially notified whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred before the deferred notification image GI is displayed, the deferred notification image GI is not noticed by the player. Occurs. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14D, the deferred notification image GI starts to be displayed in the early stage period Pf of the game, and is hidden before the early stage period Pf ends. The above-mentioned early stage period Pf is a period of a predetermined time after the game is started. Specifically, the early stage period Pf is a time shorter than the period from the start of the game to the execution of the reach effect when the reach effect is executed in the game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed. According to the above configuration, the display period of the stationary notification image GI ends before the reach effect is started. Therefore, the inconvenience that the image displayed by the reach effect by the stationary notification image GI is less likely to be noticed is suppressed. Further, the early stage period Pf is a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation pattern determined by the game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed.

The display effect of the deferred notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN is executed even when the big hit is won in this game. It is assumed that the remaining number of games image GN is not displayed when the big hit is won in the game in which the remaining number of games image GN is scheduled to be displayed. With the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that it is detected that the jackpot has been won when the remaining number of times image GN is not started to be displayed in the early stage period Pf. Further, in a game in which the deferred notification image GI is scheduled to be displayed, the same inconvenience may occur even in a configuration in which the deferred notification image GI is not displayed when a big hit is won. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

15 (a) to 15 (d) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the time when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. 15 (a) to 15 (d) show, in addition to the period in which each of the above images is displayed, the number of remaining times N until the second time-shortened gaming state at each time point.

FIG. 15A shows the time when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the period from immediately after the jackpot game ends to the start of the second short game state. As shown in FIG. 15A, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed immediately after the jackpot game is completed. Further, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time saving game state is started. However, when the number of holdings is the numerical value "0" at the time when the second short game state is started, the display of the remaining number of times image GN is continued (see FIG. 19 described later).

As shown in FIG. 15A, in the stationary notification image GI, the game in which the game count image GE displays the number “50” and the game count image GE is the number “100” in the period after the jackpot game is completed. Is not displayed in any game including the game in which is displayed. In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of times N is deferred, it may not be notified even once by each of the above images. For example, when the big hit game is won from the power-on to the 50th game, the stationary notification image GI is not displayed and the remaining number N at the time of power-on is not notified by the remaining number image GN. Therefore, it is not notified whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred.

FIG. 15B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on to the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 15B, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred. Specifically, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the time of turning on the power is a numerical value "X". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 15B, the remaining number N (numerical value “X-50”) in the game (the 51st game after the power is turned on) in which the game number image GE displays the number “50” is the numerical value “200”. The following cases are assumed.

In the above specific example of FIG. 15B, in the game in which the game number image GE displays the numerical value "50", the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number image GN are displayed. Specifically, in the above-mentioned early stage period Pf, the deferred notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. When the deferred notification image GI is displayed in the game in which the game number image GE displays the number "50", the deferred notification image GI is not displayed in the game in which the game number image GE displays the number "100". As shown in FIG. 15B, the deferred notification image GI is hidden before the end of the early period Pf. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed until the second short game state is started.

FIG. 15C is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on to the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 15 (c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred as in the above-mentioned FIG. 15 (b). Specifically, the remaining number N at the time of turning on the power is the numerical value "X", and the remaining number N (the numerical value "X") in the game (the 101st game after the power is turned on) in which the game number image GE displays the number "100". It is assumed that -100 ") is a numerical value" 200 "or less. Further, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number N (numerical value “X-50”) in the game in which the game number image GE displays the numerical value “50” is larger than the numerical value “200”. In the specific example of FIG. 15 (c) above, in the game in which the game count image GE displays the number "50", the deferred notification image GI and the remaining count image GN are not displayed, and the game count image GE is the number "100". In the game of displaying, the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed.

FIG. 15D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on to the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 15 (d), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred as in the above-mentioned FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c). Specifically, the remaining number N at the time of turning on the power is the numerical value "X", and the remaining number N (the numerical value "X") in the game (the 101st game after the power is turned on) in which the game number image GE displays the number "100". It is assumed that -100 ") is larger than the numerical value" 200 ". In the specific example of FIG. 15D described above, the game is deferred in any of the games including the game in which the game count image GE displays the number "50" and the game in which the game count image GE displays the number "100". The broadcast image GI is not displayed. On the other hand, the remaining number image GN is started to be displayed in the game in which the game number image GE displays the number "100".

16 (a) to 16 (f) are diagrams for explaining each screen M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second short game state. As will be described in detail later, each screen M displayed at the start of the second short game state changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set. Further, each screen M displayed at the start of the second short game state changes depending on the type of the set table scenario S. 16 (a) to 16 (f) are simulated views of each screen M displayed during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S.

FIG. 16A is a simulated view of the screen M1 displayed immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. The screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the effect mode immediately before the start of the second time-saving game state becomes the immediately preceding mode. As described above, in the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx, the effect symbol GAx, the hold image GBx, and the game count image GE are displayed. As shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, each of the above images displayed in the immediately preceding mode is continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

Further, in the immediately preceding mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16A, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays a number "0" as the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started. The number of the remaining number of times image GN changes in color when the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started is subtracted to a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or less. For example, in a game in which the number of remaining games until the second time-shortened game state is started is larger than the predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and the number of remaining games until the second time-shortened game state is started is displayed. In a game in which is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16a), when the first game in the second short game state is started, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed. As will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "0", the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) is immediately started regardless of whether or not the next game is started. It shifts to the 2 hour short game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number of pending games at the end of the game in which the remaining number N is subtracted from the numerical value "0" is "0". In the above case, the state shifts to the customer waiting state immediately after the transition to the second short game state. In the above customer waiting state, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 16B is a simulated view of the screen M2 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M2 is displayed by switching from the screen M1 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined time. As shown in FIG. 16B, the screen M2 displays the game count image GE, the background image GHx, the small symbol Ga, and the reserved image GBx, as in the screen M1. However, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state has started. For example, a message to the effect that the second short game state has started is displayed on the start notification image Gn. Further, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the effect image GAx is hidden, and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the effect image GAx was displayed (substantially in the center of the screen).

FIG. 16 (c) is a simulated diagram of the screen M3 displayed in the first game in the second short-time game state. The screen M3 is displayed by switching from the screen M2 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined time. As shown in FIG. 16C, the screen M3 displays each image including the small symbol Ga as in the screen M2. Further, the effect image GAx is not displayed on the screen M3 (similar to the screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on the screen M2 and the screen M3.

As shown in FIG. 16C, the start notification image Gn, the right-handed image GS1, the hold image GBx, the game count image GE, and the background image GHx displayed on the screen M2 are hidden on the screen M3. Specifically, the shield image GF (GF1, GF2) is displayed on the screen M3. The shielded image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to see (including a case where it is substantially impossible). The shielded image GF of the present embodiment shields substantially the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient if the background image GHx becomes difficult to see when the shielded image GF is displayed, and the shielded image GF may be configured to shield a part of the background image GHx.

The shielded image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and is configured to include a left shielded image GF1 and a right shielded image GF2. The shielded image GF is displayed in preference to the start notification image Gn, the right-handed image GS1, the hold image GBx, the game count image GE, and the background image GHx (on the front side of each image). The left-shielded image GF1 is moved and displayed from the left side side to the center side of the image display device 31 while the screen M2 is displayed. Further, the right-shielded image GF2 is moved and displayed from the right-side side to the center side of the image display device 31 in a state where the screen M2 is displayed. That is, when the screen M3 is displayed, the operation of closing the sliding doors is displayed on the image display device 31. On the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shield image GF1 and the position of the left side of the right shield image GF2 substantially match. However, an image representing other than sliding doors may be adopted as the shield image GF.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the right-handed image GS1 is hidden on the screen M2. On the other hand, the right-handed image GS2 is displayed on the screen M3. The right-handed image GS2 is an image for instructing that the game should be played by right-handed, like the right-handed image GS1. In the above configuration, right-handed striking is instructed by the image display device 31 on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. The right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on the front side of the shielded image GF, and the right-handed image GS1 may be visually displayed even during the period after the shielded image GF is displayed.

FIG. 16D is a simulated diagram of the screen M4 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M4 is displayed by switching from the screen M3 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, the screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielded image GF of the screen M3. For example, the left shielded image GF1 is moved and displayed on the right side of the image display device 31, the right shielded image GF2 is moved and displayed on the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielded image GF is hidden. That is, when the screen M4 is displayed, the operation of opening the sliding door is displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 16 (d), the game count image GE displayed before the shield image GF is displayed (before the sliding door is closed) is that the shield image GF is hidden (see FIG. 16 (b) above). Even if it becomes (even if the sliding door opens), it is not displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the game count image GE is hidden by being shielded by the shielded image GF. If the game count image GE is suddenly hidden, some players may feel unnatural. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience can be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16D, the effect symbol GA and the reserved image GB are hidden on the screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16D, various images including the right-handed image GS2 and the small symbol Ga are displayed on the screen M4 (similar to the screen M3 and the like). Further, on the screen M4, a rush effect for notifying the transition to the time saving mode B is executed. Specifically, the inrush image GT is displayed on the screen M4. The inrush image GT is an image for notifying that the effect mode shifts to the time saving mode B, and the name of the time saving mode B (“chance time” in the example of FIG. 16B) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16D, the background image GHz is displayed in the inrush effect.

FIG. 16 (e) is a simulated diagram of the screen M5 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, the screen M5 is displayed after the rush effect is executed (instead of the screen M4), and the mode selection effect is executed on the screen M5. The time saving mode B of the present embodiment is configured to include a plurality of types of effect modes from the time saving mode B1 to the time saving mode B3. In the mode selection effect, the player can select the effect mode (B1 to B3) by appropriately operating the effect button 8 and the cross key 40. However, regardless of which of the time saving mode B1 and the time saving mode B3 is selected, the variation pattern determination table T in the time saving mode B is common. Specifically, the effect determined by the sub CPU 121 changes according to the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect, but the variation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16 (e), a small symbol Ga is displayed in the mode selection effect. In addition, the right-handed image GS2 is displayed in the mode selection effect. That is, the right-handed image GS2 is displayed over the rush effect and the mode selection effect. Further, in the mode selection effect, a background image GHz (an example of a second background image) is displayed. However, a background image GH dedicated to the mode selection effect may be provided. As described above, the second time-saving game state may be started via the jackpot game (after the table scenario is set) or not via the jackpot game (during the scenario unset period). be. Although the details will be described later, when the second time-saving game state is started via the jackpot game, the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 18A described later), while the second is not via the jackpot game. When the time-saving game state is started, the mode selection effect is not executed (see FIG. 18B described later). As shown in FIG. 16 (e), the effect symbol GA and the hold image GB are not displayed in the mode selection effect.

FIG. 16 (f) is a simulated diagram of the screen M6 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M6 is switched from the above screen M5 and displayed, and is displayed for a predetermined time. On the screen M6, an image including the small symbol Ga and the background image GHz is displayed, and the image including the effect symbol GA and the reserved image GB is hidden, as in the screen M5 (mode selection effect) described above. The background image GH on the screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16 (f), the right-handed image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6 in place of the above-mentioned right-handed image GS2. The right-handed image GS3 is an image for notifying that the game should be played by right-handed, like the right-handed image GS1 and the right-handed image GS2. In the present embodiment, among the right-handed image GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4 described later), when the right-handed image GS3 is displayed, the voice "right-handed" is reproduced, and the other right-handed image GS is displayed. In that case, the sound is not played. However, when displaying a right-handed image GS other than the right-handed image GS3, the voice "right-handed" may be reproduced.

FIG. 17A is a simulated diagram of the time saving middle screen M7 displayed in the second time saving game state. Although the details will be described later, for example, the time saving middle screen M7 is displayed by switching from the above screen M6 (see FIG. 16F) (see FIG. 18A described later), and the first of the second time saving gaming states. It is displayed at the end of the game.

As shown in FIG. 17A, on the time saving medium screen M7 (time saving mode B), the small symbol Ga, the effect symbol GAw, the right-handed image GS4, the background image GHw, the holding image GBw, the remaining time saving image GJ, and the active image GM. Display each image including. The effect symbol GAw is an effect symbol GA displayed in each game of the time saving mode B. As described above, the effect symbol GAx (effect symbol GA in the immediately preceding mode) is displayed immediately after the first game in the second short game state is started. After that, the production symbol GAw is displayed at the end of the game. That is, the effect symbol GAw is displayed from the middle of the game. Therefore, the effect symbol GAw is variablely displayed immediately after the display is started. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is a background image GH displayed in each game of the time saving mode B. The reserved symbol GBw is displayed in the time saving mode B, and the number of reserved symbols GBw corresponding to the number of the second reserved symbols is displayed. Further, in each game of the time saving mode B, the right-handed image GS4 is displayed.

The time-saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state. However, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by a numerical value "1" at the end of each game in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, the numerical value of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted by the numerical value "1" each time each game in the time-saving game state starts. For example, it is assumed that the game is started with the remaining number of times M being the numerical value "X". In the above case, immediately after the start of the game, the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted from the numerical value "X" to the numerical value "X-1". After that, at the end of the game, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted from the numerical value "X-1". However, the configuration may be such that the update time of the remaining number M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update time of the time-saving remaining image GJ substantially coincide with each other.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the time saving middle screen M7. Note that the specific example of FIG. 17A assumes a period immediately after the display of the remaining time-saving image GJ is started in the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the time when the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted is immediately after the start of the game. However, the display start time of the time-saving remaining image GJ in the first game in the second time-saving game state is the final stage of the game after the rushing effect or the like is completed. That is, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the start of the game) in which the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted has elapsed. Due to the above circumstances, the time-saving remaining image GJ first displays the number "999" obtained by subtracting the numerical value "1" from the time-saving number of times (1000 times) in the second time-saving game state in the first game in the second time-saving game state. do.

The active image GM is an image for notifying that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. As described above, the effect mode of the second time saving game state is the time saving mode B. However, even in the first time saving game state, the time saving mode B may shift (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, if it is not notified in the time saving mode B whether or not it is the second time saving gaming state, it is difficult to grasp whether the current gaming state is the second time saving gaming state or the first time saving gaming state. Inconvenience can occur.

In the present embodiment, the activated image GM is displayed in the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state, and the activated image GM is not displayed in the time saving mode B in the first time saving gaming state and the above-mentioned gap game. Specifically, the activated image GM is displayed in the second short game state regardless of whether or not the scenario is not set. Further, regardless of the type of the table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4), the activated image GM is displayed in the second short game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 17B is a simulated diagram of the time-saving medium screen M8 displayed in each game in the first time-saving game state. Specifically, the time saving middle screen M8 is displayed in each game of the time saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 17B, in the time saving mode A, each image including the small symbol Ga, the effect symbol GAy, the reserved image GBy, the background image GHy, the right-handed image GS4, and the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the time saving remaining image GJ is commonly displayed in the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). Specifically, in the time saving mode A, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17B. As described above, in the time saving mode B, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17A. Therefore, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common area (region RJ) in the time-saving mode A (first time-saving gaming state) and the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the time saving mode A may be directly shifted to the time saving mode B. It is assumed that the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes between the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B. With the above configuration, it is assumed that some players may lose sight of the time-saving remaining image GJ immediately after the time-saving mode B is started. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect that the above inconvenience can be suppressed can be achieved.

However, in the configuration of directly shifting from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B, there may be an inconvenience that some players do not notice that the time saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed may be intentionally different between the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B. FIG. 17 (c) shows an example of the time-saving middle screen M7 in the second time-saving gaming state of the modified example adopting the above configuration. In the above modification, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ in the first time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ'in the second time-saving gaming state. According to the above modification, it becomes easy to recognize that the time saving mode A has ended and the time saving mode B has started because the area where the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed has changed. Therefore, the effect that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed can be achieved.

By the way, in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted as in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the remaining number image GN (see FIG. 14C) that displays the current value of the remaining number N may be displayed in the first time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the game count image GE (see FIG. 14A) from which the number of games up to the second time-shortening game state can be grasped may be displayed in the first time-shortening game state. That is, a specific effect according to the remaining number of times N (subtraction display of the remaining number of times image GN, etc.) may be executed in the second time-saving game state.

However, the second time-saving game state is started after the first time-saving game state is completed. Assuming that, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned specific effect is executed in the first time-saving game state, some players may be aware of the situation in which the jackpot is not won until the second time-saving game state starts. In some cases. In the above case, there may be an inconvenience that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the specific effect according to the remaining number of times N is executed in the non-time-saving game state, while the specific effect is not executed in the first time-saving game state. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

18 (a) to 18 (c) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed at the start of the time saving mode B. In the specific examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, it is assumed that the jackpot is not won at the start of the time saving mode B.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the shield image GF (see FIG. 16 (c)), the inrush image GT (see FIG. 16 (d)), and the right-handed image GS3 (see FIG. 16 (f)) displayed at the start of the time saving mode B. ) Are collectively referred to as "starting image". The above start-time image is displayed in the period from the start of the second time-saving game state to the switching to the time-saving middle screen M7 (see FIG. 17 (a) above). In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the second time-saving game state to the switching to the time-saving middle screen M7 (the period during which the image at the start is displayed) is described as "start notification period Pz (1 to 3)". In some cases. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in the start notification period Pz changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set and the type of the table scenario S.

FIG. 18A is a specific example of the case where the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the mode shifts from the immediately preceding mode (low probability non-time saving game state) to the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). In the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx is displayed. FIG. 18A shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-shortened game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when shifting from the immediately preceding mode to the time saving mode B, the screen M1 (see FIG. 16A) and the screen M2 (see FIG. 16B) are set to predetermined times. After that, the screen M3 is displayed and the shielded image GF is displayed. The background image GH is shielded (hidden) during the period when the shielded image GF is displayed. Further, after the shielded image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, the rush effect in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16D) is displayed is executed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode selection effect is displayed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16E described above) after the rush effect is executed. Is executed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16 (f)). The right-handed image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18A, the start notification period Pz1 when the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is the period until switching to the time saving middle screen M7. In the above start notification period Pz1, the screens M1 to the screen M6 are displayed, and the time for displaying each of the above screens is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As described above, the variation pattern of the game is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ts. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, there is only one variation pattern determined when the result of the big hit lottery is lost. That is, the length of the period during which the special figure is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "variable period Px") in the variable pattern (loss) determined by the variable pattern determination table Ts is unchanged (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18A, the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. That is, the variable period Px is designed to have a length that allows various effects including a rush effect and a mode selection effect to be executed. Similarly, in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the length of the variation pattern determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, and the variation pattern determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Is longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed in the first game of the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), and is not displayed in the second and subsequent games. It is assumed that the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed in the second and subsequent games of the time saving mode B. With the above configuration, there may be a problem that the image displayed in the second and subsequent games of the time saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) in the image at the start. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

However, as described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb is not set, the variation pattern determination table (Tbx) is common between the first game in the second time-shortened game state and each game after the second time (FIG. 10 (b). )reference). Therefore, in the first game in the second short-time game state, a random fluctuation pattern is determined as in the subsequent games. That is, in the scenario unset period, the length of the period during which the first game in the second time-shortened game state is executed (hereinafter referred to as "variable period Py") is variable.

In the above configuration, if the length of the start notification period Pz is the same between the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the scenario unset period, the first game in the second time-shortened gaming state in the scenario unset period. There may be a possibility that the start notification period Pz does not end by the end of. In the above case, there is a problem that the image at the start is displayed in the second and subsequent games in the second short game state. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz3 in the scenario unset period is set to be shorter than the start notification period Pz2 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

FIG. 18B is a specific example of the case where the time saving mode B starts in the scenario unset period. In the above case, the mode shifts from the normal mode (low probability non-time saving game state) to the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). As described above, the background image GHx is displayed in the normal mode. FIG. 18B shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-shortened game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the screen M1 and the screen M2 shift to the time saving mode B in the scenario unset period, the screen M1 and the screen M2 shift to the time saving mode B in the period in which the above table scenario Sb2 is set. Each is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M3 is displayed and the shielded image GF is displayed. Further, after the shielded image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, the rush effect in which the screen M4 is displayed is executed.

However, when shifting to the time saving mode B during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed after the mode selection effect is executed (after the screen M5 is displayed), but the scenario When shifting to the time saving mode B in the unset period, the mode selection effect is omitted and the right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. That is, the start notification period Pz2 in the scenario unset period omits the period in which the mode selection effect is executed as compared with the start notification period Pz1 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first game in the second time-shortened game state. In the present embodiment, when the game is played by a normal procedure, the number of second holds is 0 at the start of the first game in the second time-shortened game state. Therefore, when the second special figure is variablely displayed in the first game in the second short game state, the "long fluctuation (loss)" (about 4 seconds) among the fluctuation patterns becomes the shortest fluctuation pattern. Further, when the first special figure is variablely displayed in the first game in the second short game state, "special 1 loss (loss)" (about 7 seconds) among the fluctuation patterns is the shortest fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed to have a length shorter than, for example, about 4 seconds of "long fluctuation (loss)".

As can be understood from the above description, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends by the end of the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period. The start notification period Pz2 may be set to a shorter time (for example, about 6 seconds) than the shortest fluctuation pattern (special figure 1 loss: about 7 seconds) among the fluctuation patterns of the first special figure in the second short game state. good.

Further, as understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment, when the background image GHz is displayed instead of the background image GHx at the start of the time saving mode B (second time saving gaming state), the shielded image is displayed. GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by shielding the background image GHx at once, the player is made to understand that the time saving mode A is finished in a short period of time, and then the background image GHz is displayed at once, so that the time saving mode B is displayed. It is possible to let the player know in a short period of time that the game will start. That is, there is an advantage that it becomes easy to grasp in a short period of time that the time saving mode A has changed to the time saving mode B.

FIG. 18C is a specific example of the case where the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the mode shifts to the time saving mode B immediately after the big hit game is completed. Specifically, when the ending period of the big hit game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) is started, and the effect mode shifts to the time-saving mode B. FIG. 18 (c) shows the start time ta and the end time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the ending period is started, the rush effect in which the above-mentioned screen M4 (see FIG. 16 (d)) is displayed is executed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the rush effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16 (e) above) is displayed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16 (f)). The right-handed image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18C, when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, the time saving mode B (first time saving game state) is started, and the time saving middle screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when the table scenario Sb4 is set is predetermined. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set substantially coincides with the ending period. That is, the start image displayed when the time saving mode B starts can be displayed in the ending period.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, there is a case of shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving gaming state (see FIG. 18C) and a time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving gaming state. The mode of the effect (start effect) is different from that in the case of shifting to (FIG. 18 (b)). For example, the shielded image GF is displayed when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving gaming state, but the shielding image GF is not displayed when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving gaming state. Further, the lengths of the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 are different. In the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B, as compared with the uniform configuration.

However, the length of the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may be the same, or the shield image GF may be displayed in the start notification period Pz3. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of the effect when shifting to the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) after the end of the big hit game is different from the mode of the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B. do. Specifically, an effect of notifying that the time saving mode A starts is executed in the ending period. The ending period differs depending on whether the time saving mode A starts or the time saving mode B starts. Further, when the time saving mode A starts, the mode selection effect is not executed. Further, in the rush effect when shifting to the time saving mode A, the name of the time saving mode A is displayed.

By the way, in the configuration in which the remaining number N is subtracted at the end of the game, if the number of reservations is 0 at the end of the game, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the start of the second time-shortened game state. Since the above-mentioned customer waiting state is the second short-time gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which right-handed strike is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first game in the second short-time game state is started. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19A is a simulated diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time saving game state. As a specific example of FIG. 19 (a), it is assumed that the table scenario Sb2 of each table scenario S is set as in the above-mentioned FIG. 16 (a). In the above case, the transition from the non-time saving game state (immediately preceding mode) in which the background image GHx is displayed to the second time saving game state (time saving mode B). In the scenario unset period, in the case of the customer waiting state at the start of the second short game state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state as in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19A is displayed when the number of holdings at the start of the second short game state is 0. Therefore, on the customer waiting screen Mx, the effect symbol GAx and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the customer waiting screen Mx displays the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN, as in the screen M1. Further, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed on the customer waiting screen Mx as in the screen M1. According to the above configuration, right-handed strike is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first game in the second short-time game state is started.

FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining a period in which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time saving game state. be. FIG. 19B shows the end time point te of the game in which the remaining number N until the second time reduction game state is subtracted to the numerical value “0”, and the start time point ts of the first game in the second time reduction game state. Is done. In the above specific example, the period Pw shown in FIG. 19B is in the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting screen Mx (see FIG. 19A) is displayed in the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19B, in the period Pw where the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the same as in the case where the number of holdings in the second time-saving game state is one or more (see FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b) above). , Screen M1, screen M2 ..., Each screen is displayed in this order. Specifically, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, each screen is displayed in the order of screen M1 to screen M7 (see FIG. 18A). Further, in the scenario unset period, each screen (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) excluding the screen M5 is sequentially displayed (see FIG. 18B).

20 (a) and 20 (b) are diagrams for explaining the details of the timing for updating the numbers in the remaining number image GN. As described above, the remaining number of times image GN displays the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113. However, in the present embodiment, the time when the number of the remaining number image GN is subtracted and the time when the remaining number N is subtracted are different. The above configuration will be described in detail below. In the following, the time when the number of the remaining number image GN is updated may be simply described as "the time when the remaining number image GN is updated".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is subtracted at the end of the game (when the special figure is stopped). Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period in which the special map is variablely displayed, and a fixed period in which the special map is stopped and displayed after the variable period ends. The length of the variation period in the game is variable according to the variation pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in the game is a predetermined time (about 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a symbol confirmation command to the sub CPU 121 at the start of the confirmation period. When the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121) receives the symbol confirmation command, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed on the image control board 150 until the confirmation period ends. That is, the fixed period substantially coincides with the period during which the special symbol and the effect symbol GA are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the update time of the remaining number of times image GN. In FIG. 20A, the number of the remaining number of times the image GN displayed by the effect control board 120 (image control board 150) at each time point and the remaining number stored by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113) at each time point are shown. The number of times N is shown. Further, FIG. 20A shows the start time ts of the game and the end time te of the game. Further, FIG. 20A shows the time point ta at the end of the variable period in the game. The above time point ta is also paraphrased as the time point when the fixed period starts.

As shown in FIG. 20A, at the start time ts of the game, the remaining number of times command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The remaining count command is a command for specifying the current value of the remaining count N. When the power is cut off, the effect control board 120 of the present embodiment recovers the number of the remaining number image GN in response to the remaining number of times command transmitted after the power is restored. In the specific example of FIG. 20A, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the start of the game is a numerical value “X” (X ≧ 2). The remaining number command sent at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number N updated (subtracted) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 at the time point ta when the confirmation period starts. When the effect control board 120 receives the symbol confirmation command, the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed, and the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted. That is, it is also said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted substantially at the same time as the time point ta when the fixed period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20A, the number of the remaining number image GN is displayed by subtracting it from "X" to "X-1". However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 at the time point te when the determination period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number of the remaining number image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is the numerical value "X" as shown in FIG. 20 (a).

Suppose that at the end of the fixed period, the number of remaining image GNs is subtracted in inverse proportion. In the above inverse proportion, it is also said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted after the game is completed. However, for example, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the game is completed, some players stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number of image GN) at the end time ta of the game and end the game. It may happen. In the above case, there may be a problem that the subtraction display of the number of the remaining number image GB is not visually recognized by the player. According to the present embodiment, since the subtraction display of the number of the remaining number of times image GB is executed before the end time of the game, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 20B is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update time of the remaining number of times image GN. 20 (b) shows the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the start time point ts of the game, and the game, as in FIG. The time point ta at the end of the variable period in the above and the time point te at the end of the game are shown. Further, FIG. 20B shows the gaming state at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 20B, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "0" at the end time point te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state is started from the end point te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 20B, even in a game in which the remaining number N is subtracted from the numerical value "0", the number of the remaining number image GN is the number of the remaining number image GN when the symbol confirmation command is received, as in other games. Is subtracted. That is, at the time ta when the fixed period is started, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Further, when the determination period ends after the number "0" is displayed on the remaining number of times image GN, the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the number "0" and the second time saving game state is started.

In the above configuration, the number "0" is displayed by the remaining number of times image GN before the second time saving game state is started. However, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience of misidentifying that the second time-saving gaming state has started at the time ta when the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". In consideration of the above circumstances, in the game in which the second time-saving game state is started, the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted without subtracting the number of the remaining image GN at the start of the fixed period (the second time-saving game state is At the time of starting), the number of the remaining number image GN may be subtracted. Specifically, after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", a command that specifies that the customer waiting command is received or that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started (for example,). , The variable pattern specification command) may be received, and the number "0" may be displayed on the remaining number of times image GN. In each game, the number of the remaining number image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

21 (a), 21 (b-1), and 21 (b-2) are for explaining the display of the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 31) in the period before and after the power failure occurs. It is a figure of. As described above, the effect mode (display mode of the image display device 31) in a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referred to in the period. In the present embodiment, the image display device 31 may be controlled to an effect mode that does not correspond to the fluctuation pattern determination table in the period immediately after the power is restored. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21A is a simulated view of the recovery screen displayed when the power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), a message indicating that the power is being restored from the power failure is displayed on the restoration screen. In addition, the background image GHf is displayed on the recovery screen. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH displayed when the power is restored, and is, for example, a white (single color) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21A, it is assumed that the power supply is restored during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21A, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. In addition, an image other than the background image GHf and the right-handed image GS may be displayed. For example, the hold number image GD (see FIG. 14A described above) may be displayed on the recovery screen.

FIG. 21 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode at each time point in the period before and after the power failure occurs, and the reference variation pattern determination table T. FIG. 21 (b-1) assumes a case where the power is cut off in the big hit game. FIG. 21 (b-1) shows the time point ta when the power supply is cut off and the time point tb when the power supply is restarted. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the jackpot game ends at the time point ct, the state shifts to the customer waiting state (the number of holdings at the end of the big hit game = 0), and the first game starts at the time point td. Imagine a case.

In the present embodiment, when the power is restored from the power failure, a power failure recovery command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. For example, the main CPU 111 transmits a power failure recovery command after completing the initialization process when the power is turned on. From the power failure recovery command, whether or not the special figure is changing, the number of holds, and the game state are specified. Specifically, from the power failure recovery command, it is specified whether the game is a big hit game, a small hit game, a low-probability non-time-saving game state, a high-probability time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, or a second time-saving game state. Will be done. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), a power failure recovery command that specifies that the current game state is a big hit game is transmitted at tb at the time of power failure recovery.

As described above, in the big hit game, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the game state specified from the power failure recovery command is a big hit game, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the above-mentioned recovery screen. The type of right-handed image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, the common right-handed image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen regardless of whether the game state specified from the power failure recovery command is the big hit game or the time-saving game state. Further, the right-handed image GS originally displayed in the game state specified by the power failure recovery command may be configured to be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the jackpot game, various images including the current number of rounds and the stop-displayed jackpot effect symbol are displayed. However, the current number of rounds and the jackpot production design cannot be specified from the power failure recovery command. Therefore, if the power is cut off in the big hit game and then the power is cut off, the image that should be originally displayed in the big hit game cannot be completely restored. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power is cut off and restored in the big hit game, the recovery screen is displayed until the big hit game is completed. .. However, if the power is cut off in the big hit game and then the power is cut off, the screen may be restored to the screen displayed in the big hit game. In the above case, the screen of the jackpot game after the power is restored is displayed with the unrecoverable image (for example, the image showing the number of rounds) omitted.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to after the big hit game is completed. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), it is assumed that the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is the time saving mode B. Therefore, normally, the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is the time saving mode B.

However, the type of the variation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) referred to after the end of the big hit game is not specified from the power failure recovery command. Further, the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game can shift to both the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B (see, for example, FIGS. 11A and 11B). Therefore, in the period immediately after the power is restored, it is not possible for the effect control board 120 side to specify whether the effect mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game should be the time-saving mode A or the time-saving mode B.

When the variation pattern designation command is received, the variation pattern determination table referred to on the main control board 110 side is specified from the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. That is, the original effect mode is specified from the fluctuation pattern specification command. In the present embodiment, the original effect mode may not be specified on the effect control board 120 side until the variation pattern designation command is first received after the power is turned off and restored.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the jackpot state ends. Further, the fluctuation pattern designation command is first received after the jackpot state ends at the time td when the first game starts after the jackpot game ends. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from the time point ct when the big hit game ends to the time point td when the game starts, it is not possible to specify on the effect control board 120 side whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be set.

If it is not possible to specify whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be set on the effect control board 120 side, it is assumed that each effect executing means is controlled in the time saving mode B in inverse proportion. As described above, in the time saving mode A, the first time saving game state may end in 100 times. On the other hand, in the time saving mode B, the first time saving game state continues up to 799 times. Therefore, in the above-mentioned inverse proportion, the first time-saving game state may end after 100 times even though the mode has changed to the time-saving mode B. In the above case, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience of losing motivation for the game.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, when it is not possible to specify on the effect control board 120 side whether to set the time reduction mode A or the time reduction mode B in the first time reduction game state, each effect execution means in the time reduction mode A. (Image display device 31, etc.) is controlled. According to the above-described configuration of the present embodiment, the first time-saving game state does not end in 100 times even though the mode has been changed to the time-saving mode B. Therefore, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the player loses motivation for the game is suppressed as compared with the above-mentioned inverse proportion.

As described above, the original effect mode is specified from the fluctuation pattern specification command. In the present embodiment, the effect mode is changed to the original effect mode when the original effect mode can be specified on the effect control board 120 side. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the variation pattern designation command is received at the time point td. From the above variation pattern specification command, it is specified that the original effect mode is the time saving mode B. Therefore, at the time point td, the effect mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B. In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), when it is assumed that the original effect mode is the time saving mode A (when the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to), before and after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command, The production mode does not change in the time saving mode A.

FIG. 21 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining the effect mode at each time point in the period before and after the power failure occurs, and other specific examples of the reference variation pattern determination table. FIG. 21 (b-2) assumes a case where the power is cut off during the game of the time saving mode B (the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax or the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to). Specifically, in FIG. 21 (b-2), the game was started at the time point ts in the time saving mode B, the power supply was cut off at the time point ta during the game, and the power supply was restarted at the subsequent time point tb. Imagine a case. Further, the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2) assumes a case where the game ends at the time point ct, then shifts to the customer waiting state, and a new game starts at the time point td.

In the above specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), the original effect mode cannot be specified on the effect control board 120 side in the period from the point tb when the power is restored to the display of the new point td. Specifically, from the time tb when the power off is restored to the time tc when the game interrupted by the power off ends, in addition to the original effect mode, the fluctuation pattern in the game and the effect symbol GA to be stopped cannot be specified. .. In consideration of the above circumstances, the above-mentioned recovery screen is displayed during the period from the recovery of the power cut to the end of the game interrupted by the power cut.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), since the original effect mode cannot be specified on the effect control board 120 side in the customer waiting state from the time point tc to the time point td when a new game is started, the time saving mode A is used. Each effect execution means is controlled. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), when the variation pattern designation command is received at the time point td, the effect mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the power is cut off in the time-saving game state, when the fluctuation pattern designation command is subsequently received, the mode is switched to the original effect mode. By the way, as described above, the remaining number M of the time-saving gaming state stored by the main control board 110 side is displayed by the time-saving remaining image GJ. However, the command for specifying the remaining number M of the time-saving game state stored by the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time-saving game state after the power off is restored. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed on the time-saving remaining image GJ during the time-saving game state after the power-off is restored. In the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the power off is restored, the time-saving remaining image GJ in which the numerical part is omitted is displayed.

22 (a) to 22 (d) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the effect mode at each time point in the period before and after the power failure occurs. 22 (a) to 22 (d) show the game state at each time point in addition to the effect mode at each time point.

FIG. 22A is a specific example of the case where the power supply is cut off at the start of the second short game state. FIG. 22A assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the effect mode immediately before the start of the second short game state becomes the immediately preceding mode. Further, FIG. 22A assumes a case where the number of holdings is 0 at the time ta when the last game in the non-time saving game state (the 800th game from the big hit game) is completed, and the state shifts to the customer waiting state. do. The above-mentioned customer waiting state is the second short-time gaming state, and the right-handed image GS1 is displayed as described with reference to FIG. 19 (a) above.

FIG. 22A assumes a case where the power is cut off at the time point tb in the customer waiting state immediately after the start of the second short game state. Further, it is assumed that the power is restored from the power failure at the subsequent time point ct. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined time from the time point ct. Further, when the recovery screen is displayed, each effect executing means including the image display device 31 is controlled to the time saving mode B thereafter. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving mode B is controlled when the power failure recovery command is received.

Specifically, in the customer waiting state immediately after the power is restored, the above-mentioned time-saving medium screen M7 (see FIG. 17A) is displayed. Originally, the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16 (b)), the shield image GF is displayed (see FIG. 16 (c)), and the rush effect is executed on the above-mentioned time-saving medium screen M7 (FIG. 16 (b)). d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 16 (e)), and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed (see FIG. 16 (f)). It is displayed after the end of).

In the specific example of FIG. 22A, it is assumed that the first game in the second time-shortening game state is started at the time point d. In the above case, the period in which the rush effect or the like is executed starts from the time point td, and then the time saving middle screen M7 is displayed. If the power is not cut off, the background image GHx (background image GH in the immediately preceding mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16 (b) above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22A in which the power is cut off, the background image GHz (background image GH in the immediately preceding mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

FIG. 22B is another specific example in the case where the power supply is cut off at the start of the second short game state. In FIG. 22 (b), similarly to FIG. 22 (a) described above, the number of holdings is 0 at the time point ta when the last game (the 800th game from the big hit game) in the non-time saving game state is completed. It is assumed that the customer waiting state is entered. Further, FIG. 22B assumes a case where the power supply is cut off at the time point tb in the customer waiting state immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state, and the power is restored from the power supply cutoff at the subsequent time point ct.

The above-mentioned FIG. 22 (a) shows a specific example in which the second time saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario S is set, whereas FIG. 22 (b) shows the second time saving in the scenario unset period. A specific example in which the gaming state is started is shown. In the specific example of FIG. 22B described above, the effect mode immediately before the start of the second time-saving gaming state is the normal mode. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22 (b), the time-saving middle screen M7 in the time-saving mode B is displayed in the period after the time ct when the power supply is restored (similar to the specific example of FIG. 22 (a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22B, it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at the time point td. As described above, if the power is not cut off, the rush effect or the like in which the mode selection effect is omitted is executed when the second short game state is started in the scenario unset period (see FIG. 18 (b)). .. However, if the power is cut off in the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-saving game state to the start of the first game during the scenario unset period, it will rush when the second time-saving game state starts. All of the production is omitted (cancelled).

FIG. 22 (c) is another specific example in the case where the power supply is cut off at the start of the second short game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22 (c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the following, both the case where the table scenario Sb2 is set and the case where the scenario is not set will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (c).

The specific example of FIG. 22 (c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at the time point ta, and then the power is cut off at the time point tb before the game is finished. As described above, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the rush effect and the like are executed. Further, in the first game in the second short-time game state, a part of the rush effect and the like is executed in the case of the scenario unset period.

As shown in FIG. 22 (c), the recovery screen is displayed in the period after the time point ct when the power failure is restored. That is, the rushing effect or the like that was executed at tb when the power was turned off is canceled. FIG. 22 (c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-shortened game state ends at the time point td after the power off is restored. In the above case, the recovery screen is hidden at the time point td, and each effect executing means (image display device 31 or the like) is controlled to the time saving mode B. Specifically, the recovery screen is switched to the time saving medium screen M7.

In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the subsequent second time-saving game state is controlled from the time-saving mode B1 to the time-saving mode B1 among the time-saving modes B3. .. That is, regardless of the time saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. Further, even if the power is cut off after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state and before the time-saving mode B is selected in the mode selection effect, the time-saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. However, when the power is cut off in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time saving game state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22A described above), the time saving mode selected in the subsequent mode selection effect. Move to B. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the canceled rush effect or the like can be executed in the period after the time point td.

FIG. 22D is another specific example in the case where the power supply is cut off at the start of the second short game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the power is cut off in the game immediately before the gap game. That is, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off in the final game of the first time-saving game state of 799 times. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 22D, when the 799th game in the first time-shortening game state is started at the time point ta, and then the power is cut off at the time point tb before the game is finished. Is assumed. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the power cutoff is restored at the time point ct, and then the game executed when the power is turned off ends at the time point td. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed in the period from the time point ct to the time point td.

As shown in FIG. 22D, at the end time point td of the final game in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. As described above, when the power supply is not cut off, the effect mode of the gap game is the time saving mode B. That is, the effect mode in a series of period of the last game in the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the first game in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B. On the other hand, when the power is cut off in the final game in the first short-time game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode after the end of the game until the second special figure is displayed in a variable manner.

In the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the number of holdings is 0 at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state in which the power is cut off. In the above case, the customer is waiting from the time point td. In the above customer waiting state, the production mode becomes the normal mode. In addition, the customer waiting state is a non-time-saving game state, and the second special figure cannot be displayed in a variable manner in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the variation display of the first special figure is started at the time point te. That is, it is assumed that the gap game in which the first special figure is variablely displayed is started from the time point te. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the gap game ends at the time point tf. In the above case, the second time saving game state is started from the time point tf.

In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off in the final game in the first short-time game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode after the end of the game until the second special figure is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in principle, the effect mode is the normal mode at the time point tf when the second short game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 22D, it is assumed that the variation display of the second special figure is started at the time point tg. In the above case, the transition from the time point tg to the time point mode B is performed. When the first special figure is variablely displayed in the next game of the gap game, the effect mode of the game is the normal mode. Further, if the power is cut off due to the gap game, the right-handed image GS is not displayed on the recovery screen. After that, when the gap game is completed, the time saving mode B is controlled regardless of whether the state shifts to the customer waiting state or the special figure is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 23A is a diagram for explaining an aspect of an image (game number image GE) and a lamp (effect lamp 33) when a power failure occurs. FIG. 23A shows numbers displayed by the game count image GE at each time point before and after the power is turned off. Further, FIG. 23A shows an aspect of the effect lamp 33 at each time point. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, among the modes (light emitting modes) of the effect lamp 33, the mode in a normal game may be described as a “normal mode”. The normal aspect is variable depending on the game state and the effect performed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23A, it is assumed that the power cutoff occurs at the time point ta when the game number image GE displays the number “X”, and the power cutoff is restored at the subsequent time point tb. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed from the time point tb, and the recovery screen is hidden at the time point tc thereafter. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the present embodiment, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the restoration mode during the period when the restoration screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23A, it is assumed that the number “X” is less than 799 and the gaming state at the time point ta is a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. As the time point ct in FIG. 23 (a), when the time point ta is in the customer waiting state, it is assumed that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time point tb, and when the time point ta is the fluctuation period of the special figure, it is assumed. , The end of the variable period is assumed.

In the specific example of FIG. 23A, it is assumed that the number of remaining times N until the second time-saving gaming state is larger than the numerical value “0” at the time point ct when the display period of the recovery screen ends. Specifically, it is assumed that the gaming state after the time point ct is a non-time saving gaming state. When the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "0" at the time point ct, it is assumed that the clear operation is executed from the time when the power is cut off to the time when the power is restored, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". Will be done. Further, as another case where the remaining number N is larger than the numerical value "0" at the time point ct, it is assumed that the remaining number N larger than the numerical value "1" is deferred before and after the power is turned off. As described above, regardless of whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred before and after the power off, the game number image GE displays the number "0" at the time of power off recovery.

In the present embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "0". Further, in the period after the remaining number N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the remaining number N does not change from the numerical value "0" until the clear operation is executed or the big hit game is won. In the above configuration, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time-saving game state is not started again until the clear operation is executed or the big hit game is won. Specifically, it is assumed that 1000 games are executed in the second time-saving game state and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state, even if 800 games are executed, the second time-saving game state is not started again.

Temporarily, in the period in which the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0", in the period of the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter, "activated period"), the number of the game number image GE is It is assumed that the inverse proportion is added for each game from "0". Further, in the above inverse proportion, when the power is turned off / on during the activated period, the number of games image GE displays the number "0" after the power is restored, and then the number of the number of games image GE is added for each game. It shall be displayed. In the above inverse proportion, the number of games image GE may be added up to the number "800" during the activated period even though the second time-saving game state is not started. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be a disadvantage that the motivation for the game is reduced. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration capable of notifying whether or not it is the activated period. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23B is a simulated diagram of the screen Mh displayed when the power is turned off / on during the activated period. On the screen Mh, each image (effect symbol GA or the like) similar to the screen (see FIG. 14A above) in the normal mode before the start of the second time saving game state (not activated) is displayed. However, during the period when the second short game state is not activated, the game count image GE displays a number indicating the number of games since the power is turned on or the number of games from the big hit game, but the game count image GE on the screen Mh is the number. Is not displayed. Specifically, when the power is turned off / on during the activated period, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the game count image GE displays the symbol "???" instead of the number.

FIG. 23 (c) is a simulated diagram of the game count image GE in the activated period after the second time-saving game state is completed. The game count image GE shown in FIG. 23 (c) is a game count image GE displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state other than the activated period, with numbers omitted. According to the above configuration, the player is substantially notified whether or not the activation period has been completed.

FIG. 23D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the aspect of the game number image GE and the effect lamp 33 when the power is cut off. FIG. 23 (d) shows the numbers displayed by the game number image GE at each time point and the mode of the effect lamp 33, as in the above-mentioned FIG. 23 (a). In the specific example of FIG. 23D, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at the time point ta, and the last (1000th) game of the second time-saving gaming state is completed at the subsequent time point tb. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the time point tb becomes the activated period. In the above case, in the activated period after the time point tb, the game number image GE (see FIG. 23 (c) above) that does not display the number is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 23 (d), as shown in FIG. 23 (d) assuming a case where the power is turned off at the time point ct after the time point tb of the activated period and the power is turned on at the time point td after that. , When the power is turned on, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined time. Further, during the period when the restoration screen is displayed, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the restoration mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23D, the recovery screen is displayed up to the time point te, and then the above-mentioned screen Mh is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23 (d), in the activated period after the time point te when the screen Mh is displayed, the game count image GE displays the symbol “???” instead of the number. Further, during the period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the game count image GE, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. During the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the game count image GE, normal games can be executed. However, even during the period in which various effects are executed in the game, the effect lamp 33 continues to be displayed in the warning mode instead of the mode (normal mode) corresponding to the effect.

In the present embodiment, when the remaining number N until the second time-shortened game state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the game number image GE ends, and the game number image GE ends. Numerical addition display is executed. Further, the effect lamp 33 switches from the warning mode to the normal mode when the remaining number of times N until the second short game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". For example, when the effect lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the effect lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing a clear operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an example of the configuration of the present invention "when the number of determinations specified from the information reaches a specific number of times when the power is turned on, the notification means can be controlled in a special mode". As a result, the remaining number of times N reaches the numerical value "0" (the number of big hit lottery reaches 800 times), and the gaming state notified from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 by the power failure recovery command at the time of power restoration is In the case of a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, a configuration is adopted in which the notification means (effect lamp 33, image display device 31) can be controlled in a special mode (warning mode, display of the symbol "???").

FIG. 24A is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state is completed. As described above, the effect mode immediately after the non-time saving game state is started becomes the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24A, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, each image (effect symbol GAx or the like) displayed in the normal mode is displayed. Further, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) is completed, a left-handed image GL is displayed in addition to each of the above images.

The left-handed image GL is an image for notifying that the game should be played by left-handed. As described above, in the short-time gaming state, it is more advantageous to play right-handed than to play left-handed, and the right-handed image GS (right-handed ramp 28) indicates that the right-handed game should be played. On the other hand, in the non-time-saving game state, it is more advantageous to play left-handed than to right-handed. Therefore, it is preferable to use a configuration in which when the player shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, he / she is notified that he / she should play the game by left-handed (switching from right-handed to left-handed). In consideration of the above circumstances, the left-handed image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving gaming state is completed.

FIG. 24B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the left-handed image GL is displayed. The left-handed image GL is usually displayed for a predetermined time after shifting to the non-time saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the period from the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state to the elapse of the time is referred to as “period Th”. FIG. 24 (b) shows the above period Th.

FIG. 24B shows the presence / absence of the screen (effect mode) displayed at each time point and the left-handed image GL. The specific example of FIG. 24B assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state ends in the scenario setting period. FIG. 24B shows the period of the final game in the second short game state. In the final game in the second short-time game state, the same effect as other games (effect for notifying the success or failure of the big hit) is executed, and then the above-mentioned end effect (see FIG. 45 (b)) is executed. In some cases. In the specific example of FIG. 24 (b), the left-handed image GL is displayed over the period Th.

FIG. 24 (c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24 (c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the final game in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the final game in the second time-shortened game state is started at the time point ts, then the power supply is cut off at the time point ta (the time point before the end effect), and the power cutoff is restored at the time point tb. .. Further, it is assumed that the final game in the second short game state is restarted from the time point tb and ends at the time point te.

In the above specific example of FIG. 24 (c), the above-mentioned recovery screen (see FIG. 21 (a)) is displayed from the time point tb to the time point te. Further, the left-handed image GL is displayed for a period Th starting from the time tb when the final game is completed. However, as can be understood from FIG. 24 (c), when the power is cut off in the final game in the second time-saving game state, the end effect that should be executed thereafter is omitted. Similarly, when the power is cut off in the final game in the first short-time game state, the end effect that should be executed in the final game is omitted.

FIG. 24D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24D, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off during the period Th. Specifically, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off at the time point ta in the period Th, and the power cutoff is restored at the subsequent time point tb. In the above case, the display of the left-handed image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power off is restored before the period Th elapses, the left-handed image GL is not displayed on the restoration screen and the normal mode screen displayed after that.

25 (a-1) and 25 (a-2) are diagrams for explaining another specific example of the customer waiting screen Mx. In FIG. 19A described above, the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the start of the second time saving game state has been described. 25 (a-1) and 25 (a-2) are specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx (1, 2) displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 25 (a-1) is a simulated diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx1. On the customer waiting screen Mx1, various images (including the effect symbol GA) displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode are displayed in the same manner as the customer waiting screen Mx described with reference to FIG. 19A. Further, in the customer waiting image Mx1, in addition to each of the above images, the on-board notification image GK is displayed. The on-board notification image GK is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. For example, the on-board notification image GK displays the message "second time-saving on-board".

FIG. 25 (a-1) is a simulated diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. On the customer waiting screen Mx2, various images displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode are displayed, similar to the customer waiting screen Mx and the customer waiting screen Mx1 described with reference to FIG. 19A. However, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, the effect image GA is hidden and the demo movie is displayed instead of the background image GHx. The demo movie is configured to include, for example, a movie displayed in a reach effect. Further, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, in addition to each of the above images, the on-board notification image GK is displayed (similar to the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In the present embodiment, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are alternately displayed in the customer waiting state. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 is switched to the customer waiting screen Mx2. After that, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 is switched to the customer waiting screen Mx1. With the above configuration, it is notified that the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state in the customer waiting state (non-gaming period). Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can confirm whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state before playing the game. The mounted notification image GK may be displayed on either one of the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2, and may be hidden on the other side.

However, for example, in order to grasp whether or not the necessity of the clear operation should be confirmed, the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off depending on whether or not the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. You may want to check the status. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, it cannot be confirmed whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state depending on the mounted notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration including a display member for displaying (described) a message for grasping that the second time saving game state is provided is preferable. According to the configuration including the above display member, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state even when the power supply is cut off. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the display member is adopted will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (b-1) and 25 (b-2).

FIG. 25 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modified example when the display member is adopted. 25 (b-1) shows an excerpt of a region corresponding to the region Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a member including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “frame member”), a gaming board 10, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, etc., which can be attached to and detached from the frame member. It is composed of a member including (hereinafter referred to as "board member"). In the modified example of FIG. 25 (b-1), it is assumed that the frame member is adopted as the display member. Specifically, the message "second time saving" is displayed (described) in the vicinity of the effect lamp 33 on the right side of the two effect lamps 33 provided.

FIG. 25 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modification when the display member is adopted. FIG. 25 (b-2) shows an excerpt of a region corresponding to the region Ry shown in FIG. 1 among the gaming machines 1 in the modified example. In the modified example of FIG. 25 (b-2), it is assumed that the board member is used as the display member. Specifically, the message "second time reduction loading" is displayed below the large winning opening 16 in the game area. According to each of the above modification examples, it is possible to grasp from the display member whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state during the period when the power is not turned on to the gaming machine 1. However, the area in which the message indicating that it is possible to shift to the second short game state can be displayed can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, there is a circumstance that the message to the effect that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is more easily seen from a distant place as it is located on the upper end side of the gaming machine 1. In the modification of FIG. 25 (b-1) described above, the message is displayed on the upper end side from the center of the frame member (game machine 1). Therefore, there is an advantage that the message can be easily visually recognized even from a distant place.

Further, there is a circumstance that the player during the game tends to pay attention to the starting port (13, 14) among the board members. The starting ports (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. That is, there is a situation that the player can easily pay attention to the lower side of the board member than the center. In the modified example of FIG. 25 (b-2) described above, the message that the second time-saving gaming state is mounted is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, for example, in the modified example of FIG. 25 (b-2), there is an advantage that the message can be easily attracted to the player as compared with the configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for preliminarily determining the result of the big hit lottery. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (at the time of starting winning), the winning information is generated by the pre-determination table.

The above winning information is generated in order to predetermine the result of the big hit lottery. Specifically, the winning information includes the type of the special symbol display device (the type of the starting port detection switch that detects that the game ball has won the starting opening), the type of the special symbol, the game state, the random value for reach determination, and It is generated based on the random value for special symbol fluctuation. Further, a start prize designation command for specifying the generated prize information is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 120. By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of the preliminary determination (loss, big hit, small hit), the type of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (whether or not the reach occurs) can be determined before the variation of the special symbol starts. The winning information (starting winning designation command) of the present embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (hold change effect).

In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 26, as prize information for the first special symbol display device 20, prize information a (1, 2), prize information b (1 to 4), prize information c (1 to 4), and prize The winning information including the information d1 and the winning information e1 is set. Further, as the winning information about the second special symbol display device 21, the winning information a (3, 4), the winning information b (5 to 8), the winning information c (5 to 8), and the winning information d (1, 2) , Winning information e (1, 2), winning information f, and winning information g are set.

For example, when the winning information a1 or the winning information a3 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect of about 40,000 ms. In the above production, it will be a long hit after executing the normal reach production.

When the winning information b1 or the winning information b5 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect of about 60,000 ms. In the above effect, SP reach 1 is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and the hit is long.

When the winning information b2 or the winning information b6 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect of about 60,000 ms. In the above effect, the SP reach 2 is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and the hit is long.

When the winning information c1 or the winning information c5 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect of about 70,000 ms. In the above effects, the SPSP reach effect 1 is executed via or directly after the normal reach effect is executed, resulting in a long hit.

When the winning information c2 or the winning information c6 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect of about 70,000 ms. In the above effects, the SPSP reach effect 2 is executed via or directly after the normal reach effect is executed, and the effect becomes a long hit.

When the winning information d1 or the winning information d2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes a small hit or short hit effect of about 20000 ms.

Among each prize information, prize information e1, prize information a2, prize information b3, prize information b4, prize information c3, prize information c4, prize information e2, prize information a4, prize information b7, prize information b8, prize information c7, The winning information c8 and the winning information f are determined when the winning information is lost in the big hit lottery by the starting winning winning.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), the winning information is not set when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, the special symbol (combination of the special symbol determination random value and the symbol random value), the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value in the first special symbol display device 20 are used. However, the winning information is not set when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving game state, the start prize designation command is not generated when the game ball wins in the first start opening 13.

Next, the progress of the game in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.
<Main processing of main control board>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the main control board 110. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When the main process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a boot program to initialize a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, in the initialization process, the stack pointer is set appropriately. In the initialization process, each information for displaying the above-mentioned base value (normal number of outs, etc.) is not initialized. Further, in the initialization process, the gaming state (high accuracy flag, time saving flag) and the remaining number of times M of the time saving gaming state are not initialized. Further, the remaining number N until the time-saving game state is not initialized by the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the clear button 30 is operated (S20). When it is determined that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to the game random number value update process (S60). On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear button 30 is operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). That is, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. When it is determined that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the setting change process (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the above-mentioned setting change mode is started. In the setting change process, an operation for changing the set value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. When the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state, the setting value displayed by the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113, and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of the present embodiment, various information of the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the gaming state is initialized to the low-probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 113. The high-probability flag is set to the ON state in the high-probability gaming state and is set to the OFF state in the low-probability gaming state. Further, the time saving flag is set to the ON state in the time saving gaming state, and is set to the OFF state in the non-time saving gaming state. In the setting change process, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

Further, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the initial value "800" is set in the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state. In the above configuration, it is also said that the remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated is initialized in the setting change process. When the setting change process is completed, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the game random number value update process.

If it is determined in step S30 described above that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes a clear operation process. In the clear operation processing, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state as in the setting change processing described above. Further, in the clear operation processing, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the numerical value "800". In the setting change process and the clear operation process, each information for displaying the above-mentioned base value is not initialized. Each piece of information for displaying the base value is not initialized except when an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 to be initialized may be common or different between the setting change process and the clear operation process. Further, although it is impossible to change the set value, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the current set value is displayed on the base display 114. For example, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after shifting to step S60, the setting may be configured to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

When the clear operation process is executed, the main CPU 111 executes the game random number value update process (S60). In the above game random number value update process, the special symbol variation random value and the reach determination random value are updated. The above game random number value update process is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing of main control board>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the main control board 110. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 ms), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

When the above timer interrupt process is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. The main CPU 111 executes the time control process (S102) after executing the step S101. In the above time control process, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, and determines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22. Various timer counters are updated, such as updating and updating the normal power opening time counter that defines the opening time of the second starting port 14. Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power release time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes the random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 performs a random number update process of a special symbol determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, a small hit symbol random number value, and a hit determination random number value. Specifically, the numerical value "1" is added to each random number counter indicating each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes the initial random number value counter update process (step S104). In the present embodiment, when the random number value is added up to the maximum value, the random number value is set to the numerical value of the initial random number value counter. In the initial random value counter update process, the main CPU 111 includes a special symbol determination initial random value counter indicating a special symbol determination initial random value, a big hit symbol initial random value counter indicating a big hit symbol initial random value, and a small hit symbol. A numerical value "1" is added to each of the initial random number value counters for small hit symbols indicating the initial random number value.

After executing the initial random number counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes the input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 includes a first start port detection switch 13a, a second start port detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a large winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a), a general winning opening detection switch 18a, and an out ball. It is determined whether or not each switch of the detection switch 19a has an input.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 performs the special figure special electric control process (S106) for controlling the special symbol display device (20, 21) and the special electric accessory (opening / closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). Execute. Further, the main CPU 111 executes the Fuzu Fuden control process (S107) after executing the Tokuzu Tokuden control process. In the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol display device 22 and the normal electric accessory (opening / closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the normal power control process, the main CPU 111 executes the payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 16, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, and the general winning opening 18. Further, in the payout control process, when it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening, the main CPU 111 transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning opening to the payout control board 130.

Specifically, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the large winning opening winning ball counter, and the starting opening winning ball counter are checked, and the payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 130. After that, predetermined data is subtracted from the prize ball counter corresponding to the transmitted payout quantity specification command and updated.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes the data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (information indicating that a jackpot is in progress, etc.) transmitted to the outside of the game machine 1, starting port opening / closing solenoid data that defines an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 14b (second starting port 14), opening / closing door Large winning opening opening / closing solenoid data that defines the opening / closing pattern of 16b and the movable piece 17b (large winning opening), special symbol display device data that defines the display patterns of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, The normal symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the normal symbol display device 22 is created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes the output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs various data (starting port opening / closing solenoid data, etc.) created in step S109 described above via the port. Further, the main CPU 111 executes a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, the above-mentioned start winning designation command is stored in the above-mentioned transmission data storage area for effect.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes the counting process (S111). In the above counting process, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted in order to calculate the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 111 is a prize ball counter for base calculation when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 18 (when the game ball is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 18a) in the low probability non-time saving game state. The numerical value "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening 18) is added to (the number of normal prize balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 13, the numerical value is "3", if the game ball wins in the second starting port 14, the numerical value is "3", and in the first large winning opening 16. When the game ball wins, the numerical value "15" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter, and when the game ball wins the second big winning opening 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. On the other hand, the prize ball counter for base calculation is not added except in the low probability non-time saving game state.

When the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the main CPU 111 adds a numerical value "1" to the base calculation out counter (normal number of outs) in the counting process of the low probability non-time saving game state. On the other hand, the out counter for base calculation is not added except in the low probability non-time saving game state. Further, when the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the total out counter in the counting process regardless of the game state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes the base display process (S112). In the base display process, the base value is calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and is displayed on the base display 114. After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 returns the information saved in the above step S101 to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the input control process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the general winning opening detection switch input process (S121). In the above general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 18. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the general winning opening winning ball counter and updates it.

After executing the general winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 111 executes the large winning opening detection switch input processing (S122). In the large winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a) has been input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening (16, 17). When the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the big winning opening winning ball counter.

After executing the large winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first start opening detection switch input process (S123). In the first start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 13a has been input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 13. When it is determined in the above-mentioned first start port detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the first start port 13, predetermined data for determining a big hit is set.

After executing the first start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second start port detection switch input process. In the second start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 14a has been input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 14. When it is determined in the above second start port detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the second start port 14, a jackpot determination is made in the same manner as when the game ball enters the first start port 13. Predetermined data to be performed is set.

After executing the second start port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a has been input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15 in the above gate detection switch input process, predetermined data for performing the normal symbol lottery is set.

<First start port detection switch input processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a first start port detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. When the first start port detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 13a (S131). When it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the first start port detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 ends the first start port detection switch input process.

When it is determined that the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the start port prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting port 13 (for example, the numerical value "3") to the starting opening prize ball counter.

After updating the start opening prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133). First special symbol hold number (U1) When the hold number set in the storage area is not less than 4 (S133: No), that is, when the hold number is 4 (U1 = 4), the main CPU 111 is first started. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

First special symbol hold number (U1) When the hold number set in the storage area is less than 4 (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random value values. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a random value for special symbol determination (S134), acquires a random value for a big hit symbol (S135), acquires a random value for a small hit symbol (S136), and is a random game. A numerical value (a random value for special symbol fluctuation and a random value for reach determination) is acquired (S137).

Each random number value acquired in step S137 from the above step S134 is stored in the first special symbol storage area (first to fourth storage units). Specifically, the above-mentioned first special symbol storage area includes the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. The main CPU 111 searches for empty storage units in the order of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and stores each acquired random number value in the empty storage unit. Further, after acquiring each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area (S138).

After adding the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, the main CPU 111 executes the pre-determination process (S139). In the pre-determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each random number value acquired in step S137 from step S134 based on the pre-determination table (see FIG. 26 above) corresponding to the current gaming state.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned second start port detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the second start port 14, the same process as the first start port detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-mentioned first start port detection switch input process, the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is added, whereas in the second start port detection switch input process, the second special symbol hold number (U2) is added. Storage areas are added. Further, in the second start port detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, only the updated storage area (special symbol hold number storage area, special symbol storage area) differs between the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process, and other processes are common in principle. .. However, in the first start port detection switch input process, the start prize designation command is not transmitted even in the time-saving game state, and in the second start port detection switch input process, the start prize designation command is transmitted even in the time-saving game state. But the two are different.

<Preliminary judgment processing>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110. The pre-determination process of FIG. 31 is executed in both the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above pre-determination process is executed both when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 and when the game ball wins the second starting port 14.

In the pre-determination process, the above-mentioned winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and the starting winning designation command for specifying the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120. A look-ahead effect (for example, a hold change effect) can be executed on the effect control board 120 side in response to the start prize designation command. However, as described above, the winning information is not determined when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 in the time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the look-ahead effect when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

Specifically, when the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 13. (S151). When it is determined that the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins the first start port 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S152). ). When it is determined that the game is in the time-saving game state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the pre-determination process without generating the winning information (S161 described later is omitted). As described above, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the winning information. Therefore, according to the above embodiment, the look-ahead effect when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

When it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game state (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot provisional determination process (S153). In the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random value written in the special symbol hold storage area in response to the current start winning, and the jackpot determination process of the game started by the start winning (described later). In S207) of FIG. 33, it is tentatively determined whether a big hit is won, a small hit is won, or a loss is achieved.

When the determination of "No" is made in the above-mentioned step S151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-mentioned step S152. The process after the big hit provisional determination process (S153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 14, prize information is generated regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state (S161 described later is executed). .. That is, when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the jackpot tentative determination process has tentatively determined the jackpot (S154). When the big hit is provisionally determined (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the big hit symbol provisional determination process (S155). In the jackpot symbol tentative determination process, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol data) stopped in the game started by the start winning is tentatively determined using the random value for the jackpot symbol acquired in response to the current start winning. After executing the jackpot symbol tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 shifts to the variation pattern tentative determination process (S158).

On the other hand, when the tentative determination is not made when the big hit is tentatively determined in the big hit tentative determination process (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the tentative determination is made when the small hit is won (S156). When it is tentatively determined that the small hit is won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the small hit symbol tentative determination process (S157). In the small hit symbol provisional determination process, the small hit symbol (stop symbol data) stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally used by using the random value for the small hit symbol acquired in response to the current start prize. It is judged. After executing the small hit symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 shifts to the variation pattern provisional determination process (S159). When it is determined as "No" in step S156 described above, that is, when it is tentatively determined to be lost in the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol tentative determination process (S155, S157 described above) and has a variation pattern. The process proceeds to the provisional determination process S158.

In the variation pattern tentative determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 is acquired according to the game state, the result of the big hit tentative determination process, the result of the big hit symbol tentative determination process, the result of the small hit symbol tentative determination process, and the current start winning prize. Using the random value for special symbol fluctuation and the random value for reach determination, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is tentatively determined. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined by the variation pattern provisional determination process (S159). Further, the start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the transmission data storage area for effect (S160), and the pre-determination process is terminated.

By the above pre-determination process, when the game ball enters the first start opening 13 or the second start opening 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a start winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the start prize designation command analyzes the start prize designation command and determines in advance even before the change of the special symbol triggered by the start prize is started. It is possible to execute an effect (look-ahead effect).

However, this pre-determination process is determined only according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters each of the starting openings 13 and 14. Therefore, if the gaming state changes before processing the first hold or the second hold reserved by the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may differ from the result of the advance determination process. There is.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure special electric control process (S106 of FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special figure special electric control processing is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special figure special electric processing data (0 to 5) (S181), and refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data (S182).

For example, when the special figure special electric processing data is “0”, the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol storage determination process (step S183). Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol storage determination process, the reserved number (U1, U2) is subtracted, the variation time of the special symbol to be displayed on the special symbol display device and the variation time of the special symbol display device is set, and the special symbol display device is set. The variable display starts. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, "1" is set in the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol variation processing (S184). In the special symbol variation processing, when the variation time of the special symbol set in the immediately preceding special symbol storage determination processing elapses, the special symbol set in the special symbol storage determination processing is displayed on the special symbol display device (20, 21). To display the stop. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special figure special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop time processing (S185). In the special symbol stop time processing, the main CPU 111 stops and displays the special symbol displayed in the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). After that, if the stop-displayed special symbol is the jackpot symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "3" in the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets the opening command and the opening time for the jackpot. Similarly, if the stop-displayed special symbol is a small hit symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "4" in the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets the opening command and the opening time for the small hit. Further, if the stop-displayed special symbol is a lost symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "3", that is, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the big hit game processing (step S186). In the big hit game process, after the opening of the big hit (hereinafter referred to as "opening period"), the big winning opening 16 is opened according to the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data (opening pattern of the big winning opening 16). That is, the above-mentioned round is started after the opening period. The big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data used in the big hit game is selected according to the big hit symbol.

After the end of all rounds, the ending control (wait control) is executed for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, the period during which the ending control is executed may be described as "ending period". In addition, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be described as a "round period" (a period including a plurality of rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, "5" is set in the special figure special electric processing data.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small hit game processing (step S187). In the small hit game process, the opening control of the small hit is executed, and then the large winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid data for the small hit. After that, the ending control is executed for a predetermined period, and "0" is set in the special figure special electric processing data. After executing the small hit game process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the transition determination process (S225). In the transition determination process, the success or failure of the start condition of the second time-saving gaming state and the success or failure of the end condition of the time-saving gaming state are determined.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes the special game end processing (S188). In the special game end process, the main CPU 111 sets the game state after the big hit game to a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state (No. 1) according to the special symbol and the game state stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding special symbol change process. Set to 1 hour short game state). Specifically, when shifting to the first time saving game state after the end of the big hit, the first time saving flag is changed to the ON state. Further, when shifting to the first time-shortened game state after the end of the big hit, the initial value "100" or "799" is set for the remaining number M of the first time-shortened game state according to the big hit symbol. After setting the game state after the big hit game, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". Further, when the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state), the high-probability flag changes to the ON state.

<Special symbol memory judgment processing>
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol storage determination process (S183 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special symbol storage determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S201). If the variation of the special symbol is being displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not during the variable display of the special symbol (S201: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S202).

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S204, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is "1" or more. If there is (S202: Yes), the process is transferred to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol storage area is preferentially processed over the first special symbol storage area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (S204: No), the process is transferred to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. (S204: Yes), the process is transferred to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 uses a random number value (special symbol determination random value, A combination of a random value for a big hit symbol, a random value for a small hit symbol, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for a special symbol change.) And the start winning designation command are shifted. Specifically, a predetermined random value stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area and the start winning designation command are stored in the previous storage unit. Shift to.

For example, the random number value stored in the first storage unit and the start winning designation command are shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). Further, the predetermined random number value stored in the first storage unit and the start winning designation command are written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) and also in the determination storage area (0th storage unit). The data is erased from the special symbol hold storage area. That is, the random number value used in the previous game and the start winning designation command are deleted. In addition, the MODE of the start prize designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

After subtracting the number of holds, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot determination process (S207). In the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the data (special symbol determination random value, jackpot symbol random value, small hit) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the symbol random value).

If the jackpot is won in the above jackpot determination process, the jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined. In addition, if a small hit is won, a special small hit symbol is determined, and in the case of a loss, a special symbol for loss is determined.

After executing the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the variation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is used, and the variation pattern is determined. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the special symbol determination random value, the jackpot symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation random value.

After executing the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area (S209). Further, the main CPU 111 confirms the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, when the first hold (U1) is subtracted in the special symbol storage determination process this time, the variable display is started in the first special symbol display device 20, and the second hold is made in the special symbol memory determination process this time. When (U2) is subtracted, the second special symbol display device 21 starts variable display. After starting the variation display of the special symbol in the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in step S208 in the special symbol time counter (S212).

After setting the fluctuation time, the main CPU 111 sets "00H" in the customer waiting determination flag (S213). That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The above-mentioned customer waiting determination flag becomes "00H" during the variable display of the special symbol and during the special game. On the other hand, in other cases (non-gaming period), the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H". When the customer waiting determination flag is "01H", the effect control board 120 is notified by the customer waiting command that it is a non-gaming period. After clearing the customer waiting determination flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "1" (S214), and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

If it is determined in step S204 that the first hold (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first hold (U1) nor the second hold (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 , It is determined whether or not "01H" is set in the customer waiting determination flag (S215).

When 01H is set in the customer waiting determination flag (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the special symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, when "01H" is not set in the customer waiting determination flag (S215: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets 01H to the customer waiting determination flag so that the customer waiting command is not set many times in step S217 described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting command in the transmission data storage area for effect, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

<Special symbol memory judgment processing>
FIG. 34 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop time process (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. The above processing when the special symbol is stopped is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 sets the symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol confirmation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the confirmation period has elapsed (S221). The above confirmation period is provided so that the player can recognize that the special figure has been stopped and displayed in this game. The confirmation period is, for example, about 0.5 seconds. Until the above fixed period ends, the variable display of the special map in the next game is prohibited. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the finalization period ends (S221: No), and when the finalization period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to move to the subsequent steps.

When the confirmation period ends, the main CPU 111 sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state specification command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in this game is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as a "hit symbol"). S223). When the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol is a hit (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the hit preparation process (S224) and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is not a hit symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the transition determination process (S225) to end the special symbol stop time process.

FIG. 34 (b) is a flowchart of the hit preparation process. When the hit preparation process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in this game is a big hit symbol (S230). When it is determined that it is a big hit symbol (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S231). Further, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot initialization process (S233). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S230 that the symbol is not a big hit symbol (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "4" (small hit game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot initialization process, various types of information are initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high-probability flag that is turned on in the high-probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state. In addition, the time saving flag that turns ON in the time saving game state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number M indicating the remaining number of games in the time saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state. do.

In the jackpot initialization process, the remaining number N until the second time-shortened gaming state is initialized. In this embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except for the clear operation processing by the above-mentioned clear button operation or the trigger for starting the big hit game. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the operation number of times n (numerical value "0"), the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. With the above configuration, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted is one in the period from the current big hit game to the next big hit game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the hit start preparation process (S234). In the hit start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the big hit game is determined according to the special symbol (type of big hit). In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the small hit game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 issues an opening designation command according to the type of hit (first probability variable length hit, first probability variable short hit, first normal length hit, second probability variable length hit, small hit) to the transmission data storage area for production. (S235), the opening time according to the type of hit is set (S236), and the hit preparation process is completed.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart of the transition determination process. When the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "0" (S240). When it is determined that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, during the second time saving game state or during the activated period, the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process (S245). Later, the migration determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of times N is not the numerical value "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is in the low probability gaming state (S241). In the above-mentioned step S240, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period, "No" is determined in the above-mentioned step S240.

When it is determined that the game is not in the low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" (S246), and ends the transition determination processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is low (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number N subtracted in step S242 is the numerical value "0" (S243). When it is determined that the remaining number N after subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" after executing the time saving end determination processing, and makes a transition determination. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number N after subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition processing (S244) and then performs the special figure special electric processing data "0". , And end the migration judgment process. In the second time reduction transition processing, the numerical value "1000" is set in the remaining number M of the time reduction game state, the second time reduction flag is set to the ON state, and the second time reduction game state is started. In the second time reduction transition processing, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of the set table scenario Sb. However, in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

The transition determination process can be changed as appropriate. FIG. 35 (c) is a flowchart of the transition determination process in the modified example. In the modified example of FIG. 35 (c), when the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game is in a low-probability gaming state (S241 described above). When it is determined that the game is not in the low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-mentioned time saving end determination process (S245) to end the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a low probability game state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242 described above), and the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" or less. It is determined whether or not it is (S247). When the remaining number N after subtraction is larger than the numerical value "0" (S247: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the transition determination process. As the game determined to be "No" in step S247, a game in the first time-saving game state or the low-probability non-time-saving game state (however, N ≧ 1 after subtraction) is assumed. On the other hand, when the remaining number N is equal to or less than the numerical value "0" (S247: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the remaining number N to the numerical value "0". The game determined to be "Yes" in step S247 is a game in a low-probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number N is subtracted from the numerical value "0" (a game in which the next game is in the second time-saving game state). , The game in the second time-shortened game state, and the game in the activated period are assumed.

After executing step S248, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the migrated flag is in the ON state (S249). The transitioned flag is provided to identify whether or not the transition to the second time-saving gaming state has been completed. Specifically, the transferred flag is changed to the OFF state when the big hit game is won or when the clear operation is performed, and is changed to the ON state when the game shifts to the second short-time game state. In the above configuration, the shifted flag is in the OFF state in the period from the end of the big hit game to the transition to the second time-shortened game state, and is turned on in the second time-shortened game state and the activated period. When the main CPU 111 determines that the migrated flag is in the ON state (S249: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process and ends the migration determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the migrated flag is not in the ON state (S249: No), the main CPU 111 executes the above-mentioned second time reduction transition time process (S244) to end the transition determination process. According to the above configuration, what is determined as "Yes" in step S249 is a game in a low-probability non-time-saving game state in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "0".

FIG. 35B is a flowchart for explaining the time saving end determination process. When the time saving end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M in the time saving gaming state is the numerical value "0" (S250). The remaining number of times M is stored in the main RAM 113, and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened gaming state and the remaining number of times in the second time-shortened gaming state are stored as common data. The above configuration has an advantage that the amount of data is reduced as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of times of each time saving game state is stored as separate data.

When it is determined that the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "0" (S250: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S250: No), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M after subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S252). When the remaining number of times M after subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when the remaining number of times M after subtraction is a numerical value "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 is processed at the end of the time reduction (S253).
Is executed, and then the reduction of working hours determination process is terminated. In the time saving end time processing, for example, the time saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time saving game state (the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state) ends. In the second time reduction transition processing, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of the set table scenario Sb. However, in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

FIG. 36A is a flowchart of the general-purpose electric power control process. When the Fuzu Fuden control process is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the Fuzu Fuden processing data (0 to 3) (S401), and refers to the branch address from the loaded Fuzu Fuden processing data (S401). S402).

For example, when the normal symbol processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes the normal symbol storage determination process (step S403). In the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal figure lottery (hit determination process) is executed with a probability depending on whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. In addition, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the regular drawing lottery. Further, according to the current gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b (second starting port 14) are determined by lottery. When the normal symbol lottery is executed, the main CPU 111 changes the normal symbol storage processing data to "1" when the normal symbol storage determination process is completed.

When the normal symbol processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes the normal symbol variation processing (S404). In the normal symbol variation processing, the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the fluctuation time determined by the normal symbol storage determination process. The main CPU 111 changes the normal symbol processing data to "2" when the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

When the normal symbol processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the normal symbol stop processing (S405). In the normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol storage determination process is stopped and displayed for at least a predetermined wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds). When the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol stop processing, the normal symbol processing data is changed to "3".

When the normal power processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the open / close control process (S405). In the open / close control process, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol stop process, the open / close door 14b is opened / closed in the operation mode determined by the normal symbol memory determination process. When the main CPU 111 ends the open / close control process, the main CPU 111 changes the normal power processing data to "0".

FIG. 36B is a flowchart of the normal symbol storage determination process. The above-mentioned normal symbol memory determination process is executed in the above-mentioned normal symbol memory control process.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol storage determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the normal symbol hold number G (the number of reserved normal symbol lottery) is a numerical value "1" or more (S410). When it is determined that the normal symbol hold number G is not greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" (G = 0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol hold number G is the numerical value "1" or more (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the normal symbol hold number G (S411) to shift the storage area. (S412).

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned ordinary symbol gate 15, a hit determination random number value is acquired and stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area. The normal symbol reservation storage area includes the storage units from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. When the main CPU 111 acquires the hit determination random value, the main CPU 111 stores the hit determination random value in the order of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit among the vacant storage units. In step S412 described above, the hit determination random value stored in the first storage unit is stored (shifted) in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the normal symbol hold storage area. Further, the hit determination random value stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit.

When the hit determination random value is stored in the determination storage area, the main CPU 111 determines the hit determination random value according to the gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the numerical value specified in the above-mentioned hit determination table (see FIG. 6B) matches the hit determination random number value. After that, the main CPU 111 determines a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed using the above-mentioned normal symbol determination table (see FIGS. 7 (b-1) and 7 (b-2)) according to the game state (S414). ..

Further, the main CPU 111 determines the variation time by lottery according to the game state (S415), and determines the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b by lottery according to the normal symbol determined in step S414 and the game state (S416). The opening / closing door 14b operates (opens / closes) in the operating mode determined in S416 in the operating state. After determining the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the normal symbol processing data to "1" (S417), and ends the normal symbol storage determination process.

Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 will be described. As described above, when the effect control board 120 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern designation command is determined and executed by lottery.

<Main processing of production control board>
FIG. 37A is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the effect control board. In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs an initialization process. In the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main process from the sub ROM 122 and initializes the sub RAM 123.

After executing the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 executes the recovery time notification process (S520). In the recovery time notification process, a process for notifying whether or not the second time-saving game state has already been activated is executed. After executing the recovery notification process, the sub CPU 121 performs the effect random value value update process (S530). In the effect random number value update process, the sub CPU 121 updates various random value values stored in the sub RAM 123. The effect random value value update process is repeatedly executed until the interrupt process is executed.

FIG. 37B is a flowchart of the restoration notification process. When the recovery time notification process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the display of the power recovery screen is a high-probability game state or a big hit game (S521). When it is determined that the game is in a high-probability gaming state or a big hit game (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 121 decides to control the effect lamp 33 in a normal mode (a mode corresponding to the game state) (S524), and at the time of restoration. Ends the notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the high-probability gaming state or the jackpot game (S521: No), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M at the end of the display of the power recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S522). ). When it is determined that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S522: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode (S525), and ends the restoration notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number M is the numerical value "0" (S522: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the remaining number N at the end of the display of the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523). ).

When it is determined that the remaining number N at the end of the display of the recovery screen is not the numerical value "0" (S523: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to display the numerical value "0" in the game count image GE (S524). It is decided to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode, and the restoration notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S523 described above that the remaining number of times N at the end of the display of the recovery screen is a numerical value "0" (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 121 assigns the symbol "???" to the game number image GE. It is decided to display (S526), it is decided to control the effect lamp 33 in the warning mode (S527), and the restoration notification process is terminated.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control board>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process. The sub CPU 121 executes a timer interrupt process approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt process is started, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area (S601).

After saving various information to the stack area, the sub CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the effect control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counter, the sub CPU 121 executes the command analysis process (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the command in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 123.

After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect input control process (S604). As will be described in detail later, in the effect input control process, control according to the operation of the effect button 8 is executed. After executing the effect input control process, the sub CPU 121 executes a data output process (S605) for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S606, the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 121.

<Command analysis processing>
39 and 40 are flowcharts illustrating the command analysis process (S603 of FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the command has been received (S611). If there is no command in the receive buffer (No in step S611), the sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the receive buffer (Yes in step S611), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S621.

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S622, and if it is not a customer waiting command (No in step S621), the sub CPU 121 processes in step S631. To move.

In step S622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting effect pattern determination process for determining the customer waiting effect pattern. Specifically, the customer waiting effect pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined customer waiting effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Therefore, the data based on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start prize designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a start prize designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S632, and if it is not a start prize designation command (No in step S631), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S641. Move the process to.

In step S632, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the received start winning designation command and executes the hold storage process corresponding to the starting winning designation command. The start prize designation command is associated with information related to a big hit, a small hit, a loss, and a fluctuation pattern tentatively determined by the preliminary determination process. In the hold storage process, information (winning information) about the newly reserved first hold (U1) or second hold (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 123.

In step S633, the sub CPU 121 executes the pending change effect determination process. The sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect described later in the hold change effect determination process according to the start prize designation command (winning information). The hold change effect is a so-called look-ahead effect, and the hold image GB (see FIG. 29 (a)) described later is displayed in any of a plurality of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow color). Specifically, in the hold change effect, the mode of the hold image GB may be changed stepwise (for example, in the order of blue → red) to the final special mode. When the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the hold change effect, the sub CPU 121 determines in advance a final special mode and a time (scenario) in which the mode of the hold image GB changes.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern specification command (Yes in step S641), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command (No in step S641), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S651. Move the process to.

In step S642, the sub CPU 121 performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining one variation effect pattern from a plurality of variation effect patterns based on the received variation pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the hold display data stored in the first hold storage area and the second hold storage area and the data corresponding to the start winning designation command, and the information of the hold display data after the shift. Is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, and the hold display mode update process is performed.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an effect symbol designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol specification command (Yes in step S651), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S652, and if it is not the effect symbol specification command (No in step S651), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S661. Move the process to.

In step S652, the sub CPU 121 performs an effect symbol determination process for determining the effect symbol GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command is analyzed to determine the effect symbol data constituting the combination of the effect symbol GA according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the symbol command based on the determined effect symbol data is executed. Set in the production symbol storage area.

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a symbol determination command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S661), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S662, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (No in step S661), the sub CPU 121 processes in step S671. To move. In step S662, the sub CPU 121 performs an effect symbol stop process for setting a symbol stop command for displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbol GA in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a command for specifying a normal figure fluctuation pattern. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal map fluctuation pattern specification command (Yes in step S671), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S672, and if it is not a normal map fluctuation pattern specification command (No in step S671). ), The process is transferred to step S681 of FIG. 40. In step S672, the sub CPU 121 performs a normal map variation effect pattern determination process for determining one normal map variation effect pattern from a plurality of normal map variation effect patterns based on the received normal map variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a long release start command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a long release start command (Yes in step S681), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S682, and if it is not a long release start command (No in step S681), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S681. Move the process to. In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs the effect processing during the long opening. Here, a notification effect is executed in order to notify the player that the second starting port 14 is opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time saving gaming state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S691), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S692, and if it is not a normal symbol confirmation command (No in step S691), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S700. Move the process to. In step S692, in order to stop and display the normal symbol effect symbol, the sub CPU 121 sends the effect symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the symbol stop command for stopping and displaying the normal symbol effect symbol in the sub RAM 123. Performs normal symbol fluctuation stop processing to be set in the transmission buffer.

In step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state specification command (Yes in step S700), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S701, and if it is not a game state specification command (No in step S700), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S711. Move the process to.

In step S701, the sub CPU 121 executes a game state setting process for setting the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 123. In step S711, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening command (Yes in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S712, and if it is not an opening command (No in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S721. ..

In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a hit start effect pattern determination process for determining a hit start effect pattern. Specifically, the hit start effect pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined hit start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined hit start effect pattern is controlled by the image control board 150 and the lamp. In order to transmit to the board 140, the data based on the determined hit start effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a big winning opening opening designation command indicating the start of a big hit round game. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a large winning opening open designation command (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S722, and if it is not a large winning opening open designation command (No in step S721). ), The process is transferred to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs the effect pattern determination process during the round to determine the jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, the effect pattern during the round is determined for each round to be started, based on the large winning opening opening designation command having information on how many round games are to be started. Then, the determined effect pattern during the round is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. ..

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round end designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a round end designation command (Yes in step S731), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S732, and if it is not a round end designation command (No in step S731), the sub CPU 121 moves to step S741. Move the process to. In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs a paused effect pattern determination process for determining an effect pattern between each round.

In step S741, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending command (Yes in step S741), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S742, and if it is not an ending command (No in step S741), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S751. ..

In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a hit end effect pattern determination process for determining a hit end effect pattern. Specifically, the hit end effect pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined hit end effect pattern is controlled by the image control board 150 and the lamp. In order to transmit to the board 140, the data based on the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

In step S751, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a big winning opening ball entry command. The above-mentioned big winning opening command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when a game ball wins in the big winning opening. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a big winning opening entry command (Yes in step S751), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S752, and if it is not a big winning opening entry command (No in step S751). ), Ends the command analysis process. In step S752, the sub CPU 121 executes a large winning opening command transmission process for transmitting the large winning opening command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In the above-mentioned large winning opening ball entry command transmission process, the large winning opening entry ball command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

<Production input control processing>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the effect input control process by the effect control board. First, in step S831, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no effect button detection signal (No in step S831), the process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is an effect button detection signal (Yes in step S831), step S832 Move to processing.

In step S832, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123. Here, if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub CPU 121 ends the process and if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set (step). Yes) in S832, the process proceeds to step S833.

The button operation effect execution enable flag is used to determine whether or not the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed based on the button operation, and the flag "01". If it is, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation, and if the flag is “00”, it indicates that it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation, and the operation validity period of the effect button 8 is indicated. The flag "01" is set at the start of the operation, or the flag "00" is set when the effect button 8 is operated or the operation valid period ends without the effect button 8 being operated.

In step S833, the sub CPU 121 sets the button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 8. Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the effect input control process to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be described. In the image control board 150, when a command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the host CPU 151 reads out the audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received command for effect, and the audio in the audio output device 34. The host CPU 151 reads the animation control program from the host ROM 153 to control the image display in the image display device 31.

Here, the processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the image control board. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs an initialization process. In this process, the host CPU 151 reads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 and instructs the initial settings of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200 in response to the power being turned on.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs an effect pattern specification command analysis process for analyzing an effect pattern specification command (command stored in the receive buffer of the host RAM 152) transmitted from the effect control board 120. When the image control board 150 receives a command transmitted from the effect control board 120, a command reception interrupt process of the image control board 150 (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The effect pattern specification command analysis process confirms whether or not the effect pattern specification command (+ effect control command) is stored in the receive buffer. If the effect pattern specification command is not stored in the receive buffer, the process proceeds to step S903 as it is. If the effect pattern specification command (+ effect control command) is stored in the receive buffer, a new effect pattern specification command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read effect pattern specification command. At the same time, the animation pattern is decided from each animation group. Then, when the animation pattern is determined, the read effect pattern specification command is deleted from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter" updated in step S921 described later and the animation pattern determined in step S902. do.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 selects a display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. Will be generated. Then, when the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156a of the VRAM 156 via the CPUI / F203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the FB switching flag = 01. Here, as described later in FIG. 43 (b), the FB switching flag is set if the previous display list drawing is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms). The FB switching flag = 01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the previous drawing is completed. If the FB switching flag = 01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag = 00 (No in step S905), waits until the FB switching flag = 01. do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and shifts the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing on the already output display list, the drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register. That is, the execution of drawing for the display list output in step S904 is instructed. After that, the processes of steps S902 to S907 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Interruption processing of image control board>
The interrupt process of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The interrupt process of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt process performed by inputting a drawing end interrupt signal and a V blank interrupt process performed by inputting a V blank interrupt signal. There is.

<Host CPU drawing end interrupt processing>
FIG. 43A is a flowchart illustrating a drawing end interrupt process by the image control board. When the drawing of a frame (1 frame) of a predetermined unit is completed, the VDP 200 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPUI / F203. When the drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes the drawing end interrupt process. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 01 (turns on the drawing end flag), and ends the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on every time the drawing is completed.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 43B is a flowchart illustrating the V blank interrupt process by the image control board. The VDP200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPUI / F203 every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms). When the host CPU 151 inputs the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes the V blank interrupt process.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs a process of updating various counters of the "scene switching counter", the "wait frame", and the "frame counter". In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the drawing end flag = 01. That is, it is determined whether or not the drawing of the frame of the predetermined unit is completed. If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), the host CPU 151 ends the current V blank interrupt process. do. That is, even if the V blank interrupt signal is input, if the drawing is not completed, the processing after step S923 is not performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S924, the host CPU 151 gives an instruction to the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the “display frame buffer” and the “drawing frame buffer”. In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 42), and ends the current V blank interrupt process. do.

Next, the outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly described. When the effect control board 120 receives the effect command, the lamp control board 140 reads out the effect movable body operation program based on the received effect command, controls the operation of the effect movable body 32, and receives the command. The effect lighting device control program is read out based on the effect command to control the effect lamp 33 and the light guide body 60. Further, in the lamp control board 140, when a command for the effect button is received from the image control board 150 via the effect control board 120, the effect button operation program is read out based on the received command for the effect button, and the effect button is displayed. 8 is controlled.

FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation effect pattern determination table. In the above-mentioned variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 412 refers to the variation effect pattern determination table and determines the variation effect pattern.

In the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern determination table is provided for each game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). In a specific example of FIG. 44, a variation effect pattern determination table referred to in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state is shown. That is, the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 44 is referred to by the sub CPU 121 when the variation pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 above.

Specifically, in the variation effect pattern determination process, the variation effect pattern is determined by lottery according to the variation pattern (variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command) determined by the main CPU 111 and the random value for effect. To. The random number value for effect has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is acquired by the sub CPU 121 when the variable effect pattern determination process is started. For example, when the main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern a1x and any of the numerical values "0 to 50" is acquired as the effect random value, the variation effect pattern 1 is determined.

FIG. 44 shows an outline of the effect configuration of each variable effect pattern. For example, in the variable effect pattern 1, when the game is started, the normal effect is executed, and then the normal reach is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect pattern 2, the normal effect is executed when the game is started, and then the normal reach is executed after the pseudo continuous effect is executed. In the above pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the effect symbol GA that has been variablely displayed, and causes the variable display again. The above pseudo-continuous production may be executed a plurality of times in one game (variation). For example, in the variable effect pattern 5, two pseudo-continuous effects are executed, and in the variable effect pattern 14, three pseudo-continuous effects are executed.

<Second Embodiment>
Other embodiments of the present invention will be described below. For the elements whose actions and functions are equivalent to those of the first embodiment in each of the embodiments exemplified below, the reference numerals referred to in the description of the first embodiment will be diverted and detailed description of each will be omitted as appropriate.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are diagrams for explaining the end effect executed when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends. In the end effect, it is notified that the time-saving game state will end. Further, the end effect includes a first end effect (see FIG. 45 (a)) and a second end effect (see FIG. 45 (b)). Although the details will be described later, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed when the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 45A is a simulated diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the first end effect. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the first end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a hold number image GD, and an end image GP1 are displayed. Further, in the first end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The above first end effect is executed in the last game in the time-saving game state. As described above, in the final game in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the judge effect is executed. When the judge effect is executed in the last game in the time-saving game state, the first end effect is executed after the judge effect is executed.

The end-time image GP1 in the second embodiment displays the number of winning big hit games and the number of acquired game balls in a specific period. For example, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the first time-shortened game state, the big hit game is won again in the first time-shortened game state, and then 100 games are executed after the second big hit game, and the first time-shortened game state is executed. Suppose that is finished. In the above case, the image GP1 at the end is the number of winnings (2 times) and acquisition of the big hit game in the period (specific period) from the winning of the first big hit to the end of the second short game state. The number of game balls played is displayed. Further, the end-time image GP1 displays the name of the time-saving mode and a message to the effect that the time-saving mode ends.

FIG. 45B is a simulated diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the second end effect. As shown in FIG. 45B, in the second end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a hold number image GD, and an end image GP2 are displayed. Further, in the second end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The above-mentioned second end effect is executed in the last game of the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states.

The end-time image GP2 in the second embodiment displays the name of the time-saving mode and a message to the effect that the time-saving mode ends. Further, the above-mentioned end image GP1 displays the number of winnings of the big hit game and the number of acquired game balls in a specific period, but the end image GP2 does not display the above information. Although the details will be described later, the end time image GP2 is displayed when the second time saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time saving game state ends without winning the big hit game.

FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of the time when the end effect is executed. FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e) show the game state and the variation pattern determination table T at each time point in addition to the time when the end effect is executed.

FIG. 46A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the time when the first end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46A, it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the big hit game is completed, and the first time-saving game state is ended. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in each game in the early stage, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in each game in the final stage, and the fluctuation pattern is determined in the final game. Table Tj1 is referenced. In the second embodiment, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the first end effect is executed after the judge effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46A, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the first time-saving game state is completed.

FIG. 46B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the time when the second end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46 (b), it is assumed that 100 times of the first time-saving game state is started after the big hit game is completed, then 700 times of the game is executed, and the second time-saving game state is started. That is, it is assumed that the second short game state is started in the scenario setting period. In the above case, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and various effects including the rush effect and the mode selection effect are executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 46 (b), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state ends without winning the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the final game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period. In the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to, the second end effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period is completed.

Suppose that the first end effect is executed when the second short game state ends. In the above configuration, it is notified that the number of big hit games won in the second short game state is 0. In addition, the base value of the time-saving game state is smaller than 1. Therefore, in the first end effect when the second short game state ends, an excessively small number of acquired game balls is notified. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience that the first end effect is annoying. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of winnings of the big hit game and the number of acquired game balls are not notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 46 (c) is a specific example in the case where the end effect is not executed when the time-saving game state ends. FIG. 46 (c) is a specific example of the case where the second time-saving gaming state is started in the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state of the scenario unset period ends. In the first embodiment described above, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-shortening gaming state during the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period.

As shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the second time-shortened game state during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in all games (including the final game). Further, the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is completed in a relatively short time. Therefore, in a configuration in which the end effect is executed in the final game in the second time-shortened game state during the scenario unset period, the time of the end effect is too short, and the player may not be able to grasp the content of the end effect. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above inconvenience can be easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46 (c), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period is completed.

Further, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, in the scenario setting period, the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the last game in the second time-shortening game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game. (See FIG. 46 (b)). On the other hand, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the last game in the second time-shortening game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game (see FIG. 46 (c)). ). That is, the fluctuation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-shortened game state (the last game in the second time-shortened game state, the next game of the game) may differ between the scenario set period and the scenario unset period. be. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the fluctuation pattern at the end of the second short game state is rich in variation and the fun of the game is improved.

FIG. 46 (d) is a specific example of the case where the second time-saving gaming state is started in the scenario unset period, as in the above-mentioned FIG. 46 (c). However, in the specific example of FIG. 46 (c), it is assumed that the big hit is not won in the second short game state, whereas in the specific example of FIG. 46 (d), the big hit is won in the second short game state. Imagine a case. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 46 (d), it is assumed that a big hit is won in the second time-saving game state, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the game shifts to the first time-saving game state (100). In the above case, the first end effect is executed when the first short game state ends.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the present embodiment, if the big hit is not won in the second time-saving game state, the first end effect is not executed (see FIG. 46 (c)), and in the second time-saving game state. If the jackpot is won, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46 (d)). According to the above configuration, for example, the fun of the production is improved as compared with the configuration in which the first end effect is not uniformly executed when the second time reduction game state is entered and then the time reduction game state ends. There are advantages.

FIG. 46 (e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the time when the end effect is executed. FIG. 46 (e) assumes a case where the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues for 799 games, and the second time-saving game state is started via the gap game. In addition, a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state becomes the time-saving mode B. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referred to in a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state. However, even in the gap game of the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T different from the variation pattern determination table Tax may be referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 46 (e), the end effect is not executed at the end of the first time-saving game state (799 times). According to the above configuration, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are set as a series of time-saving game states, as compared with the configuration in which the end effect is executed in, for example, the final game or the gap game in the first time-saving game state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46 (e), the end effect may be executed in the final game or the gap game in the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 46 (e), in the final game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Te2 is referred to, and the second end effect is executed. That is, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-shortened game state ends (the final game in the second time-shortened game state or the next game of the game). Further, even in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed and the first end effect is not executed when the second short game state ends. However, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect may be executed when the second time-saving game state ends. Further, in the above period, the end effect (including the second end effect) may not be executed when the second short game state ends.

It should be noted that the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-shortening game state (the final game in the second time-shortening game state or the next game of the game). May be. According to the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table T is compared with the configuration in which the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second short game state may not be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. There is an advantage that the number of types can be reduced.

FIG. 46 (f) is a diagram for explaining a modified example adopting a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-shortened gaming state may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Is. The specific example of FIG. 46 (f) assumes a period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as in the case of FIG. 46 (b) of the second embodiment. In the modification, the variation pattern determination table referred to in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is different from the second embodiment, and the variation pattern determination table referred to in the period in which the other table scenario S is set ( The type and order) are the same as those in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the modified example, there is a variation pattern of the final game in the second time-shortened gaming state between the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which the scenario is not set (see FIG. 46 (c)). The determination table (Tax) is common, and the variation pattern determination table (Tn1) of the next game of the final game in the second time-shortening game state is common. According to the above modification, there is an advantage that the number of types of the variation pattern determination table can be reduced as compared with, for example, the second embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the third embodiment includes the third time-saving gaming state in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. In the third time-saving game state, a predetermined special symbol (time-saving symbol described later) shifts to the trigger of the stop display in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different in each time-saving gaming state.

In the third embodiment, the number of time reductions differs between the time reduction game states. Specifically, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state is 100 times. As in the first embodiment, the number of time reductions in the subsequent first time reduction game state may be different depending on the special symbol (big hit symbol) that is stopped and displayed when the big hit game is started. Further, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be 101 times or more, or 99 times or less. The number of time reductions in the second time reduction game state is 1000 times. Further, the number of time reductions in the third game state is 100 times or 1000 times.

<Big hit judgment table>
47 (a-1) and 47 (a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the jackpot determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47 (a-1) determines whether the stop result of the special symbol change in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, a small hit, a third time reduction, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is a jackpot determination table A referred to when the game is played. FIG. 47 (b-2) is a jackpot determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities for small hits and the same jackpot probability. Further, the winning probability of the third time reduction is different between the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the first special symbol display device 20 wins the third time reduction, but the second special symbol display device 21 does not win the third time reduction.

In the jackpot determination table in the third embodiment, a special symbol determination random value that is a "big hit", a special symbol determination random value that is a "small hit", and a special symbol determination random value that is a "third time reduction" Numerical values are specified. In the big hit lottery, the special symbol judgment random value acquired when the game ball wins at the start opening is compared with the special symbol judgment random value specified in the big hit judgment table, and if both match, the big hit, Win a small hit or the third time reduction. The jackpot determination table (A, B) shown in FIGS. 47 (a-1) and 47 (a-2) is based on the low-probability random number determination table and the high-probability random number determination table, as in the first embodiment. It is composed. The main CPU 111 determines one of "big hit", "small hit", "third time reduction", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted special symbol determination random value.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 47 (a-1), the two special symbol determination random number values are determined to be "big hits". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". Further, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6A-1, four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hits" regardless of whether the low probability random number determination table is used or the high probability random number determination table is used. Is determined, and one special symbol determination random number value is determined to be "third time reduction". Temporarily, a random number value that is not determined to be any of "big hit", "small hit", and "third time reduction" is determined to be "missing".

The big hit determination table A and the big hit determination table B differ in the random value for special symbol determination determined to be the third time reduction. Specifically, in the jackpot determination table A, one special symbol determination random value is determined to be the third time reduction, but the jackpot determination table B does not include the special symbol determination random value determined to be the third time reduction. .. In the above configuration, if the game ball wins in the first start opening 13, it can be won in the third time reduction, but when the game ball wins in the second start opening 14, it does not win in the third time reduction. However, the configuration may be such that when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 14, the player can win in the third time reduction. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the winning probability of the third time reduction is lower when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14 than when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 47 (b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not a stop result of a normal symbol change is a hit in a normal map lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 47B is composed of a random number determination table in the non-time saving game state and a random number determination table in the time reduction game state. The above-mentioned random number determination table in the time-saving game state is commonly referred to in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

<Design determination table>
48 (a-1) to 48 (a-4) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a large hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a lost symbol determination table. The time saving symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (time saving symbol) when the third time saving is won in the big hit lottery. The big hit symbol determination table, the small hit symbol determination table, and the lost symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 48 (a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a time-saving symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins in the third time saving, the main CPU 111 refers to the time saving symbol random value. The random number range of the random number value for the time saving symbol is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, when winning in the third time saving triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 13, the main CPU 111 has "21" as stop symbol data if the acquired random number value for the time saving symbol is "0" to "70". "(Special symbol J1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. When the stop symbol data "21" is determined, the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

As shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), if the winning in the first starting port 13 is used as an opportunity to win the third time saving and the acquired random number values for the time saving symbols are "71" to "99". , "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. When the stop symbol data "22" is determined, the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-shortening game state of 100 times. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-shortening game state of 1000 times.

48 (b-1) and 48 (b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol determination table is commonly used in each game state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state).

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time saving game state>
FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. In the above variation pattern determination table, variation patterns a (1x to 3x), variation patterns b (1x to 6x), and variations are used as variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. Any of the pattern c (1x to 6x), the variation pattern dx, the variation pattern ex, the variation pattern fx, the variation pattern g, and the variation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in the variable pattern in which the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. However, the reach effect may not be executed in the variable pattern in which the small hit symbol or the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big hit, the small hit, or the third time reduction is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random value is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49", the variation pattern h1x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed over about 40,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern h1x, the normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the shift to the third time reduction is notified. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed for about 60,000 ms. Further, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the normal reach effect and the SP reach 1 are executed on the image display device 31, and the shift to the third time reduction is notified.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49", the above-mentioned variation pattern h1x is determined. Further, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the above-mentioned variation pattern h2x is determined. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern that can be determined is common between the special symbol J1 and the special symbol J2, but they may be different. Further, the variation pattern h2x may be more easily determined when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.

<Variation pattern determination table for time-saving game state>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in the low-probability time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. The above variation pattern determination table is used in the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above variation pattern determination table, variation patterns a (1y to 3y) and variation patterns b (1y to 3y) are used as variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. 1y to 6y), variation pattern c (1y to 6y), variation pattern dy, variation pattern ey, variation pattern f (1y, 2y), variation pattern g, and variation pattern h (1y, 2y) are determined. ..

By the way, as described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the process shifts to the third time saving gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the game does not shift to the third time-saving gaming state. That is, the time saving symbol is invalid in the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving gaming state.

Assuming that when an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a fluctuation pattern longer than normal fluctuation (normal reach, fluctuation in which SP reach 1 is not executed) is likely to be selected, as in the case where a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Assume the configuration. With the above configuration, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience that the fluctuation of the special symbol until the invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is annoying.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration in which the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed is adopted. Specifically, as described in FIG. 8 above, when the time-saving symbols (special symbol J1 and special symbol J2) are stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x is determined. To. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low-probability time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation pattern h1y or the variation pattern h2y is determined instead of the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is effective, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1x is about 40,000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2x is about 60,000 ms. On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is invalid, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1y is about 2000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2y is about 2000 ms.

In the above configuration, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the variation time of the special symbol display device is common regardless of whether the time saving symbol is valid or invalid.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is configured to be shorter than that in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. To. It should be noted that when the invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer (or equivalent length) variation pattern than when the valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed may be determined.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for preliminarily determining the result of the jackpot lottery in the third embodiment. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (at the time of starting winning), the winning information is generated by the pre-determination table (similar to the first embodiment). By the start prize designation command indicating the above prize information, the result of the preliminary judgment (loss, big hit, small hit, third time reduction), the type of special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern (whether or not reach occurs) are set before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Can be determined. The winning information (starting winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (pending change effect described later).

In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 51, prize information a (1, 2), prize information b (1 to 4), prize information c (1 to 4), and prize are used as prize information for the first special symbol display device 20. The winning information including the information d1 and the winning information e1 is set. Further, as the winning information about the second special symbol display device 21, the winning information a (3, 4), the winning information b (5 to 8), the winning information c (5 to 8), and the winning information d (1, 2) , Winning information e (1, 2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h (1, 2) are set.

When the winning information h1 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 1 of about 40,000 ms. When the winning information h2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 2 of about 60,000 ms. When the winning information h (1, 2) is selected at the time of starting winning, the special symbol J (time saving symbol) is determined in the game started by the starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state, third time-saving gaming state), the first start port 13 is used. The winning information is not set when the game ball wins. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, the special symbol (combination of the special symbol determination random value and the symbol random value), the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value in the first special symbol display device 20 are used. However, the winning information is not set when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving game state, the start prize designation command is not generated when the game ball wins in the first start opening 13.

<Preliminary judgment processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The pre-determination process of FIG. 52 is executed in both the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above pre-determination process is executed both when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 and when the game ball wins the second starting port 14.

When the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 13 (S1151). When it is determined that the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins the first start port 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S1152). ). When it is determined that the game is in the time-saving game state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the pre-determination process without generating the winning information (S1161 described later is omitted).

When it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game state (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot provisional determination process (S1153). In the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random value written in the special symbol hold storage area in response to the current start winning, and in the jackpot determination process of the game started by the start winning. It is tentatively determined whether the jackpot is won, the small hit is won, the third time is shortened, or the player is lost.

When the determination of "No" is made in the above-mentioned step S1151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-mentioned step S1152. The process after the big hit provisional determination process (S1153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 14, prize information is generated regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state (S1161 described later is executed). .. That is, when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the jackpot tentative determination process has tentatively determined the jackpot (S1154). When the big hit is provisionally determined (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the big hit symbol provisional determination process (S1155). In the jackpot symbol tentative determination process, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol data) stopped in the game started by the start winning is tentatively determined using the random value for the jackpot symbol acquired in response to the current start winning. After executing the jackpot symbol tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 shifts to the variation pattern tentative determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, when it is not tentatively determined to win the jackpot in the jackpot tentative determination process (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is tentatively determined to win in the third time reduction (S1156). When it is tentatively determined that the third time reduction is won (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the time reduction symbol provisional determination process (S1157). In the time-saving symbol provisional determination process, the time-saving symbol (stop symbol data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning is provisionally determined using the random number value for the time-saving symbol acquired in response to the current start winning. .. After executing the time-saving symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 shifts to the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160).

When the tentative determination is not made if the jackpot tentative determination process is won in the third time reduction (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the tentative determination is made if the small hit is won (S1158). When it is tentatively determined that the small hit is won (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the small hit symbol tentative determination process (S1159). In the small hit symbol provisional determination process, the small hit symbol (stop symbol data) stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally used by using the random value for the small hit symbol acquired in response to the current start prize. It is judged. After executing the small hit symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 shifts to the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160). When it is determined as "No" in step S1158, that is, when it is tentatively determined to be lost in the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol tentative determination process (S1155, S1157, S1159 described above). The process shifts to the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process S1160.

In the variation pattern tentative determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 is the game state, the result of the big hit tentative determination process, the result of the big hit symbol tentative determination process, the result of the time saving symbol tentative determination process, the result of the small hit symbol tentative determination process, this time. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is tentatively determined by using the random value for special symbol variation and the random value for reach determination acquired according to the start winning prize of. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined by the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1161). Further, the start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the transmission data storage area for effect (S1162), and the pre-determination process is terminated.

By the above pre-determination process, when the game ball enters the first start opening 13 or the second start opening 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a start winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the start prize designation command analyzes the start prize designation command and determines in advance even before the change of the special symbol triggered by the start prize is started. It is possible to execute an effect (look-ahead effect).

<Processing when the special symbol is stopped>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop time process by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop time processing is started, the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition determination processing (S1231). In the second time saving transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the transition to the second time saving gaming state has been established. As described above, it is possible to shift to the second short-time gaming state when the jackpot is not won for a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability gaming state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times the jackpot is not won in the jackpot determination process from the transition to the low-probability gaming state to the present time may be described as "cumulative number m". The cumulative number of times m is counted by, for example, a counter provided in the main RAM 113. When the above cumulative number of times m reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter, "operation number of times n"), the game shifts to the second time-saving game state. The number of operations n of the third embodiment is "800 times". The number of operations n can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the case where the loss is determined by the big hit determination process, the cumulative number of times m is added even when the small hit or the third time reduction is won. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is added in both the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. That is, the cumulative number of times m is added to all the non-winning games other than the high-probability game state. When it is determined in the second time reduction transition determination process that the opportunity to shift to the second time reduction gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the second time reduction gaming state.

After executing the second time reduction shift determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the third time reduction shift determination process (S1232). In the third time saving transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the transition to the third time saving gaming state has been established. As described above, it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. When it is determined in the third time reduction transition determination process that the opportunity to shift to the third time reduction gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the third time reduction gaming state.

After executing the third time reduction shift determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the determination period has elapsed (S1233). The above confirmation period is provided so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in this game. The determination period is, for example, about 0.5 seconds. Until the above confirmation period ends, the variable display of the special symbol in the next game is prohibited. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the finalization period ends (S1233: No), and when the finalization period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to move to the subsequent steps.

When the confirmation period ends, the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process (S1234). In the time saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the end trigger of the time saving gaming state is established. Specifically, in the time saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the time saving gaming state has reached the time saving number of times. When it is determined that the number of games in the time-saving game state has reached the time-saving number of times, the time-saving game state ends. When the time reduction end determination process is completed, the main CPU 111 sets the game state specification command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in this game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). When the main CPU 111 determines that it is a big hit symbol (S1236: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S1237). Further, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot initialization process (S1238).

In the jackpot initialization process, various types of information are initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high-probability flag that is turned on in the high-probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state. In addition, the time saving flag that turns ON in the time saving game state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number M indicating the remaining number of games in the time saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state. do.

As will be described in detail later, the time saving flags are the first time saving flag that is turned on in the first time saving game state, the second time saving flag that is turned on in the second time saving game state, and the time saving flag that is turned on in the third time saving game state. Includes the 3rd time saving flag to be in the state. In the jackpot initialization process, all the time saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Further, the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state is stored in a separate counter for each time-saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-shortened gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-shortened gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-shortened gaming state are stored separately. In the jackpot initialization process, all the remaining number Ms are initialized to the numerical value "0".

In the jackpot initialization process, the above-mentioned cumulative number m (number of addictions) is initialized. In the third embodiment, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized in principle except for the clear operation processing by the above-mentioned clear button operation or the trigger for starting the big hit game. For example, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, but the cumulative number of times m is not initialized. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized even at the time of the third short-time winning or the small hit winning. As will be described in detail later, in the above configuration, the number of times that the second short-time game state can be entered is one in the period from the current big hit game to the next big hit game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the jackpot start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the jackpots (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot in the transmission data storage area for effect (S1240), sets an opening time according to the type of jackpot (S1241), and performs special symbol stop processing. finish.

In step S1236 described above, when it is determined that the special symbol stopped in this game is not a big hit symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a small hit symbol (S1242). ). When the small hit symbol is stopped (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" (S1243), and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol stopped in this game is not a small hit symbol (S1242: No), that is, when the lost symbol or the time saving symbol is stopped, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" ( S1244), the processing when the special symbol is stopped is terminated.

FIG. 54 (a) is a flowchart of the second time saving transition determination process (S1231 in FIG. 53 described above). As described above, the second time saving transition determination process is executed when the special symbol is stopped.

When the second time reduction shift determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won in this game (S1261). When it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit has not been won (a loss, a small hit, or a third time reduction) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 is in a low probability gaming state (low probability time reduction gaming state or low probability). It is determined whether or not the game is in a non-time saving game state (S1262). When it is determined that the game is not in the low-probability gaming state (high-probability gaming state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time reduction transition determination process.

When it is determined that the gaming state is low (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the cumulative number of times m (S1263). Specifically, in the second time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 19A, the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 20 and the special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display device 21. Performed in both cases. Therefore, in the game in which the big hit is not won and the game is in the low probability gaming state, the cumulative number of times m is added regardless of the special symbol display device (20, 21) in which the special symbol is stopped.

After adding the cumulative number of times m, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the cumulative number of times m matches the numerical value "800" (S1264). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operations n (n = 800) in which the second short game state is activated and the cumulative number of times m match. When it is determined that the cumulative number of times m does not match the number of operations n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 ends the second time reduction transition determination process.

When it is determined that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of operations n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving gaming state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time saving flag to the ON state (S1266), and ends the second time saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in the game after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number of times m is continuously updated from the number of operations n. Specifically, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized in principle except when the clear operation process by operating the above-mentioned clear button or when the big hit game is won. In the above configuration, it is determined that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of operations n only once in the period from the end of the current big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. That is, in the period from the end of the current big hit game to the start of the next big hit game, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted is one.

FIG. 54B is a flowchart of the third time saving transition determination process (S1232 in FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. The third time reduction shift determination process is executed immediately after the second time reduction determination process described above. When the third time reduction shift determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game is in the low probability non-time reduction game state (S1281). When it is determined that the game is not in the low-probability non-time-saving game state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 ends the third time-saving transition determination process.

When it is determined that the game is in the low probability non-time saving game state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in this game is the special symbol J1 (time saving symbol) (S1282). .. When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has been stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-shortened gaming state (1S283).

When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). When it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, when it is determined that none of the time saving symbols (J1, J2) has been stopped, the main CPU 111 ends the third time saving transition determination process. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving gaming state (S1285). In step S1283 or step S1285 described above, after storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 in the third time saving game state, the main CPU 111 changes the third time saving flag to the ON state (S1286). After that, the main CPU 111 ends the third time reduction shift determination process.

FIG. 54 (c) is a flowchart of the time saving end determination process (S1234 of FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. In the time saving end determination process, when the end trigger of the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state) is established, the time saving flag corresponding to the time saving game state (first time saving flag) is established. , 2nd time saving flag, 3rd time saving flag) is changed to the OFF state. As described above, when the big hit game is started, all the time saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in FIG. 53 above).

When the time reduction end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first time reduction flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not it is in the first time reduction gaming state (S1301). When it is determined that the first time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1301: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S1305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first time saving flag is in the ON state (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M1 in the first time saving gaming state (S1302). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M1 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1303).

When it is determined that the remaining number of times M1 is the numerical value "0" (S1303: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the first time saving flag to the OFF state and proceeds to the process to step S1305 (S1304). That is, the process proceeds to step S1305 after ending the first time-saving game state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of times M1 is not the numerical value "0" (S1303: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1304 and shifts the process to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the second time saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not it is in the second time saving gaming state. When it is determined that the second time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second time saving flag is in the ON state (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M2 in the second time saving gaming state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M2 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1307).

When it is determined that the remaining number of times M2 is the numerical value "0" (S1307: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the second time saving flag to the OFF state (S1308), and proceeds to the process to step S1309. That is, the process proceeds to step S1309 after ending the second short game state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of times M2 is not the numerical value "0" (S1307: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1308 and shifts the process to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the third time saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not it is in the third time saving gaming state. When it is determined that the third time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third time saving flag is in the ON state (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M3 in the third time saving gaming state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M3 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1311).

When it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is the numerical value "0" (S1311: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the third time saving flag to the OFF state (S1312), and ends the time saving end determination process. That is, the third time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving end determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is not the numerical value "0" (S1311: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1312 and ends the time saving end determination process.

The remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variation display of the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and when the variation display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. To. That is, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted regardless of the type of the special symbol display device that is variablely displayed in this game.

55 (a), 55 (b), and 55 (c) are simulated views of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 55 (a) is a simulated view of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 55 (b) is a simulated view of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. FIG. 55 (c) is a simulated view of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In each game, the image display device 31 of the third embodiment includes the effect symbol GA (1 to 3), the reserved image GB (1, 2), the fourth symbol GC (1, 2), and the reserved number image GD (1, 2) and various images including the small symbol Ga are displayed (similar to the first embodiment).

The effect symbol GA of the third embodiment includes the effect symbol GA1 (see FIG. 55 (a)), the effect symbol GA2 (see FIG. 55 (b)), and the effect symbol GAw3 (see FIG. 55 (c)). The effect symbol GA1 is displayed in a low-probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, the effect symbol GA2 is displayed in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. In the present embodiment, the common effect symbol GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. The effect symbol GA3 is displayed in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the present embodiment, the effect symbol GA is different between the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, but the effect symbol GA may be common in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed. Specifically, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC, which differs depending on the gaming state, is displayed. Further, in the big hit game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The hold number image GD of the third embodiment is common to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as in the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, a common hold number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common hold number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different pending number image GDs are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the big hit game, the hold number image GD may be displayed.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit symbol. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the small hit symbol. Similarly, the small symbol Ga stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and stops and displays the lost symbol when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed. Further, in principle, the small symbol Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol GA when the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed. For example, when a big hit is won and the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed at "7,7,7", the small symbol Ga is also stopped and displayed at "7,7,7", and the small hit is won and the effect symbol is displayed. When the GA stops and displays at "7, 5, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays at "7, 5, 7", wins in the third time reduction, and the production symbol GA is "7, 9, 7". ] And "7. Time saving (an example of a special symbol described later). 7", the small symbol Ga is also stopped and displayed at "7, 9 and 7" and "7. Time saving and 7".

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, a common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the big hit game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display. In addition to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. 1 The display mode may be different from that of the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

As described above, the effect symbols GA (1, 2) are different between the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. On the other hand, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. In the above configuration, when the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is changed to the low-probability time-saving gaming state (including the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state), the mode of the effect symbol GA changes while the small symbol is used. In other words, the aspect of Ga does not change. Similarly, it is paraphrased that the mode of the effect symbol GA changes while the mode of the small symbol Ga does not change when the low-probability time-saving gaming state is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the game count image GE is displayed as in the first embodiment. The number of the game count image GE of the third embodiment is added immediately after the game is started. However, the number of the game count image GE may be added at the end of the game (substantially at the same time as the addition of the cumulative number m).

The above-mentioned game count image GE is displayed from the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state until the end of the low-probability non-time-saving game state. However, the display of the game count image GE may be started after the number of games in the low-probability game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times). Further, although the game number image GE of the present embodiment displays the number of games in the low-probability game state, the number of games until the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be displayed. In the above configuration, the displayed number of games is subtracted for each game. Further, the game count image GE may be displayed in a low probability time-saving game state. Further, although the game count image GE of the present embodiment is merely an embodiment showing the number of games, it is expected to shift to the second time-shortening game state, for example, "until the start of the second time-shortening game state, 750 more times". The wording may be displayed together.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state. The remaining time saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M in the time saving game state. For example, immediately after the first time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the start of the third time saving game state, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted by the numerical value "1" at the start of the game.

It should be noted that conventionally, a gaming machine (so-called "ST machine") in which a high-probability time-saving gaming state is completed in a predetermined number of times (for example, "100 times") is known. When the above ST machine is adopted, the remaining time saving image GJ displaying the remaining number of times of the high probability time saving gaming state may be displayed. In addition, the remaining time-saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time-saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the remaining time-saving image GJ (hereinafter "remaining time-saving") that displays the remaining number of times in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the configuration in which both of the images GJy) are displayed, the modes of the remaining time-saving image GJx and the remaining time-saving image GJy may be different. For example, the remaining time saving image GJx displays characters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29 (b). Further, it is assumed that the remaining time-saving image GJy displays characters and numbers as in the case of the remaining time-saving image GJx. In the above configuration, the remaining time-saving image GJx may display black characters and white numbers, and the remaining time-saving image GJy may display white characters and black numbers.

In the present embodiment, the background image GHx is displayed in the low-probability non-time saving gaming state (see FIG. 55 (a)). Further, the background image GHy is displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 55 (b)), and the background image GHv is displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 55 (c)). That is, the background image GH is different in each of the above game states. However, the background image GH may be common in all or part of each of the above game states. For example, the background image GH may be shared between the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state.

In the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), when the remaining number of times M becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or less, the remaining number of times M is highlighted and displayed. For example, it is preferable that the message "remaining 5 times!" Is displayed in the substantially center of the image display device 31 when the remaining number of times M is subtracted to 5 times.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the right-handed image Gsy is displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), the right-handed ramp 28 instructs right-handed. The right-handed image Gsy is displayed during the period in which the right-handed lamp 28 indicates right-handed. Further, the right-handed image Gsy is hidden during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 does not instruct right-handed.

Specifically, the right-handed image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the jackpot game to the period after the start of the first short-time game state. Further, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of operation n (the nth lost symbol is stopped and displayed) and the second time-shortened gaming state is entered. Similarly, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the third time-saving gaming state is entered. It should be noted that the right-handed image Gsy may be temporarily hidden when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is executed during the period in which the right-handed lamp 28 is instructed to hit right. However, during the period when the right-handed image Gsy is temporarily hidden, a lamp controlled by the sub CPU 121 or an image different from the right-handed image Gsy indicates that the player should play right-handed. Is preferable.

The reserved image GB includes the reserved image GB1 (see FIG. 55 (a)) and the reserved image GB2 (see FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c)). The reserved image GB1 is the first special symbol reserved storage area (first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) or the second special symbol reserved storage area (first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Is displayed when the above-mentioned random value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored in. The reserved image GB2 is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area in the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

The reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R11 to the area R14 and from the area R21 to the area R24 of the image display device 31. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area (when the first hold number is added to the numerical value "1"), the hold image GB1 is displayed in the area R11. Similarly, when the determination information is stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R12, and when the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the determination information is stored in the area R13. When the reserved image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R14. Further, when the determination information is stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R21, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage unit, the determination information is reserved in the area R22. When the image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R23, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R24. Will be done.

When the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) in the low-probability non-time saving game state, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, each reserved image GB1 in the area R11 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the reserved image GB1 in the area R21 is moved from the area R21 to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed.

The reserved image GB2 is displayed in the area R14 from the area R11 of the image display device 31. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in the area R11, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage unit, the determination information is reserved in the area R12. When the image GB2 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in the area R13, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in the area R14. Will be done.

When the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the reserved image GB2 in the area R14 is moved from the area R11 to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the reserved image may be displayed when the determination information is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area.

In the above configuration, the reserved images GB (1, 2) displayed in the area R move to the area R to the left of the area R each time the game is executed, and are finally displayed in the area R0. .. Further, when the game in which the reserved image GB is displayed in the area R0 (the game in which the determination information acquired at the start of the display of the reserved image GB is determined by the jackpot determination process) is completed, the reserved image GB is hidden. .. The time when the reserved image GB displayed in the area R0 is hidden can be appropriately changed.

When the start prize designation command is received, the sub CPU 121 of the third embodiment starts displaying the reserved image GB. Further, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the hold image GB with reference to the start prize designation command. Specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern for executing the hold change effect. When the variation pattern (winning information) specified from the start winning designation command is a variation pattern for executing the hold change effect, the sub CPU 121 determines the execution of the hold change effect. When the result of the pre-judgment specified from the start prize designation command is a big hit, the hold change effect is more likely to be executed than when the result of the pre-judgment is a loss.

When the execution of the hold change effect is decided, the mode (for example, color) of the hold image GB changes to a predetermined mode. For example, FIG. 29 (a) described above assumes a specific example in which the reserved image GB of the region R12 is displayed in a special mode and the reserved image GB of another region R is displayed in a normal mode.

Specifically, the hold image GB is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) when the hold change effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the execution of the hold change effect is determined, the hold image GB changes to a special mode (for example, blue) at any time during the display period of the hold image GB. The time when the reserved image GB changes to a special mode is the time when the reserved image GB is moved (shifted), the middle of the game before the reserved image GB moves to the area R0, and the reserved image GB. It is conceivable that the game is in the middle of the game after moving to the area R0.

In the hold change effect, the hold image GB changes to one of a plurality of special modes (red, gold, rainbow color in addition to blue). In addition, the mode of the reserved image GB may change a plurality of times (stepwise) during the display period of the reserved image GB. For example, when the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the hold change effect, the final special mode and the time (scenario) in which the mode of the hold image GB changes are determined in advance. Specifically, the final special mode and the time when the mode of the hold image GB changes are determined according to the result of the preliminary determination specified from the start prize designation command and the number of holds. However, as will be described in detail later, a limited period may be provided in the third embodiment. During the above limited period, the pending change effect is not determined (restricted).

FIG. 56A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the limited period. As described above, during the limited period, the pending change effect is not determined even if the start prize is won. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" from the start of the game (at the start of the special symbol change) in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797". The time limit is until the end of the game (when the special symbol change stops). That is, the limited period is from the start of the game four times before the game transitioning to the second time-shortened game state to the start of the second time-shortened game state. As described above, the maximum number of first hold numbers is four. Therefore, the above limited period is paraphrased as a period during which the determination information held in the first special symbol holding storage area can be acquired until the second time-saving gaming state among the low-probability non-time-saving gaming states.

It is assumed that the hold change effect can be determined when the determination information held in the first special symbol hold storage area until the second time-saving game state is acquired in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the above inverse proportion, the player may be able to grasp that the determination information determined to be a big hit is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the above inverse proportion, the jackpot game is played while grasping that the right to execute the jackpot game is retained by maintaining the second hold number to the numerical value "1" or more in the second time saving game state. You can play without intentionally generating it. In the above inverse proportion, the inconvenience that the gambling of the player is remarkably agitated may occur.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, among the low-probability non-time-saving game states, the hold change effect is not determined during the limited period in which the determination information held until the second time-saving game state can be acquired. Adopted. Even during the limited period, the main CPU 111 generates a start prize designation command by the preliminary determination process, and the start prize designation command is received on the sub CPU 121 side. Therefore, the limited period is a period in which the hold change effect can be determined by the sub CPU 121, but it is also said to be a period in which the determination of the hold change effect is intentionally restricted. With the above configuration, the player cannot grasp from the reserved image GB that the determination information determined to be a big hit is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area at the time of shifting to the second time-shortened gaming state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 56 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the hold change effect is determined. Specifically, FIG. 56 (b-1) shows a pending change when a start prize is won in a period other than the restricted period (hereinafter, may be referred to as “unrestricted period”) in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The probability that the production will be decided is shown. Further, FIG. 56 (b-1) shows the probability that the hold change effect is executed for each result of the preliminary determination at the time of starting winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary determination is lost. Specifically, when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 20%. Further, if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 5%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is always determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the pending change effect may not be determined.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. Specifically, when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 50%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is always determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect may not be determined. If the result of the preliminary determination is a small hit, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 10%.

By the way, as described above, the main control board 110 transmits a cumulative number command capable of specifying the cumulative number m to the effect control board 120. From the above cumulative number of times command, the sub CPU 121 can specify the number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated. For example, it is assumed that the number of games until the second short game state is activated is "X times". Further, it is assumed that the number of holdings is X or more. In the above case, the sub CPU 121 can grasp that the big hit is not won in the X-time game by analyzing the start prize designation command. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 can grasp in advance from the cumulative number of times command and the start prize designation command that the second time saving game state is activated in the game after X times.

Therefore, the reserved image GB displayed in the area R0 in the game that shifts to the second time-saving gaming state may be configured to be able to change to a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. As the reserved image GB of the special aspect, for example, a reserved image GB that displays the message "Start second time reduction?" Can be considered. However, in the above configuration, when the hold change effect is determined to suggest that the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, depending on the player, the hold change effect indicates that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit. May cause the inconvenience of misidentifying it.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the hold change effect for notifying the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. Specifically, the hold change effect does not include the effect of changing the hold image GB in the above-mentioned special aspect. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. However, it may be configured so that the reserved image GB can be changed in a special aspect.

FIG. 56 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the hold change effect is determined in the limited period. As shown in FIG. 56 (b-2), in the limited period, the pending change effect is not determined regardless of the result of the preliminary determination. However, in the limited period, the pending change effect may be determined with a lower probability than the non-restricted period. Further, the pending change effect may be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit in the limited period. Further, the pending change effect may be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is other than the loss in the limited period.

FIG. 56 (c) is a simulated screen of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the limited period. During the limited period, various images described with reference to FIG. 29 (a) above are displayed. Further, during the limited period, the emphasized image GZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (c). The emphasized image GZ is an image for emphasizing the number of remaining games until the transition to the second time-shortened game state.

The enhanced image GZ described above is displayed, for example, in the vicinity of substantially the center of the screen of the image display device 31. Further, the emphasized image GZ is displayed immediately after the game is started, and is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display time of the emphasized image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined in the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience that the emphasized image GZ displayed in the current game is displayed when the next game is started is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that shifts to the second short-time game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797"), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message "three more times" is displayed. Is displayed. Similarly, in the game two times before the game that shifts to the second short-time game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "798"), the highlighted image GZ that displays the message "two more times" is displayed. , In the game one time before the game that shifts to the second short-time game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "799"), the highlighted image GZ that displays the message "one more time" is displayed, and the second In the game (a game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "800") that shifts to the two-time reduction game state, the highlighted image GZ that displays the message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the game in which the enhanced image GZ is displayed is not limited to the above example. Specifically, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game before the restriction period starts. For example, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game five times before the game that shifts to the second short-time game state. Further, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game after the restriction period is started. For example, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed only in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. Further, the emphasized image GZ of the third embodiment is configured to display words that are expected to shift to the second time-saving game state, such as "until the start of the second time-saving game state, three more times". May be.

According to the above-mentioned emphasized image GZ, there is an advantage that it becomes easy for the player to grasp that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is performed. In a configuration in which the hold change effect is executed during the period when the emphasized image GZ is displayed, it is assumed that the player pays attention to the hold change effect and the emphasized image GZ is not paid attention to. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a limited period is provided immediately before the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state, and the hold change effect is not executed during the period when the emphasized image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the effect that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and the player can easily grasp that the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state is particularly remarkable. It should be noted that the effect of making it easier for the player to understand the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is guaranteed at a minimum just by preventing the hold change effect from being executed during the limited period, so it is emphasized during the limited period. Instead of displaying the image GZ, the game count image GE displayed from before the time limit may be continuously displayed.

57 (a-1) to 57 (a-4), and 57 (b-1) to 57 (b-4) show the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol, and FIGS. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with the period in which the opening / closing door 14b is operated (the second start opening 14 is opened). In addition, in each of the above figures, in addition to the period in which the normal symbol fluctuates and the period in which the opening / closing door 14b is operated, the gaming state at each time point is shown. In addition, each of the above figures shows the number of holds at each time point.

As described above, in the non-time saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is about 10 seconds. Further, in the short-time game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is about 1 second. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state may be described as "variation time Ha". In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state may be described as "variation time Hb". As described above, the variation time Hb of the normal symbol in each time saving game state (first to third time saving gaming states) is common.

Further, in the non-time saving game state, the total opening time of the opening / closing door 14b when the open symbol (long open symbol, short open symbol) is stopped and displayed is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode (total opening time, number of times of opening) of the opening / closing door 14b when the opening symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as “operation mode Da”. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the opening / closing door 14b when the opening symbol is stopped and displayed is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as “operation mode Db”. As described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b in each time-saving gaming state is common.

FIG. 57 (a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-1) assumes a case where the variation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57 (a-1) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57 (a-1), the normal symbol is stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbol is stopped to the time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. Further, the normal symbol storage determination process (see FIG. 36 (b)) for starting the next variation display of the normal symbol is executed immediately after the time point ta2. When the normal symbol storage determination process is executed, the number of holdings is subtracted, and a new variation display of the normal symbol is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-1), the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Ha is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after the time point ta2.

FIG. 57 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes a case where the variation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, as in FIG. 57 (a-1) described above. .. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2), it is assumed that the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped. Further, it is assumed that the wait period in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed ends at the time point ta2. In the above configuration, immediately after the time point ta2, the normal symbol memory determination process for starting a new game is executed.

The specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) is different from the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-1) described above in that the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving gaming state at the time point tx. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the process shifts to the third time-saving game state. The specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes a case where the transition trigger of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is established at the time point tx.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a-2), the time point tx is before the time point (immediately after the time point ta2) when the new normal symbol storage determination process is executed. Specifically, the time point tx is a time point in the middle of the variation display of the normal symbol that stops at the time point ta.

In the third embodiment, even if the variation display of the normal symbol started in the non-time saving gaming state is changed to the time saving gaming state, the variation display is continued until the variation time Ha is reached. That is, the fluctuation time Ha determined at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol is not changed even if the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the variation display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2), even if the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the variation display of the normal symbol stopped at the time point ta1, the variation display is continued until the variation time Ha is reached. In the above configuration, since the already determined fluctuation time Ha is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol, lost symbol) determined at the start of the variation are not changed even if the gaming state changes during the variation display. In the above configuration, since the already determined normal symbol is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after the time point ta2, the hit determination random number value acquired in the non-time saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving game state. Further, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Db of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b.

FIG. 57 (a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-3) is a variation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, as in FIGS. 57 (a-1) and 57 (a-2) described above. Suppose that is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57 (a-3) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3), it is assumed that the open symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point ta1, and the open / close door 14b is changed to the operating state. In addition, in FIG. 57 (a-3), the time point when the open symbol is stopped and the time point when the open / close door 14b is in the operating state are shown to substantially coincide with each other. However, in reality, the opening / closing door 14b is put into operation after the waiting period ends after the open symbol is stopped. That is, the time point when the opening / closing door 14b is in the operating state is after the time point ta1. The same applies to FIGS. 57 (a-4), 57 (b-3) and 57 (b-4) described later. However, the configuration may be such that the time when the open symbol is stopped ta1 and the time when the opening / closing door 14b is in the operating state substantially coincide with each other.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3), the operation mode Da is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Further, it is assumed that the operation of the opening / closing door 14b is completed at the time point ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process is executed immediately after the time point ta2, and a new variation display of the normal symbol can be started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3), the gaming state at the time point ta2 is the non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the fluctuation time Ha is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 57 (a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-4) assumes a case where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, as in FIG. 57 (a-3) described above. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57 (a-4) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-4), at the time point tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after the time point ta2), the low-probability non-time-saving game state is changed to the low-probability time-saving game. It differs from the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3) described above in that it shifts to the state. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-4) assumes a case where the opening / closing door 14b shifts from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving gaming state during the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening / closing door 14b shifts to the time-saving gaming state during the operation of the opening / closing door 14b started in the non-time-saving gaming state, the operation of the opening / closing door 14b is continued in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Da of the non-time-saving gaming state determined at the start of the change of the normal symbol is not changed even if the operation mode Da is changed to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening / closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the already determined operating mode of the opening / closing door is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 31 (a-4), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after the time point ta2, the hit determination random number value acquired in the non-time saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving game state. Further, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the fluctuation time Hb is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b.

FIG. 57 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-1) shows a case where the variation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (including the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state) stops at the time point ta1. Is assumed. As described above, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Hb in the time-saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 57 (b-1) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1), the normal symbol is stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbol is stopped to the time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1), the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a low-probability time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after the time point ta2.

FIG. 57 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-2) assumes a case where the fluctuation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state stops at the time point ta1, as in FIG. 57 (b-1) described above. do. Further, FIG. 57 (b-2) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), from the low-probability time-saving gaming state at the time point tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after the time point ta2 when the wait period ends). It differs from the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1) described above in that it shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2) assumes a case where the low-probability time-saving gaming state is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at the time point tx during the variation display of the normal symbol. In the above case, for example, the remaining number of times M (2, 3) in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state may be subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the time point tx.

In the third embodiment, even if the variation display of the normal symbol started in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation display is continued until the variation time Hb is reached. That is, the fluctuation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not changed even if the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state is performed in the middle of the variation display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), even if the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state in the middle of the variation display of the normal symbol stopped at the time point ta1, the variation display is continued until the variation time Hb is reached. .. In the above configuration, since the already determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after the time point ta2, the hit determination random number value acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time saving game state. Further, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the fluctuation time Ha is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b.

FIG. 57 (b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-3) shows the variation display of the normal symbol started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, as in FIGS. 57 (b-1) and 57 (b-2) described above. It is assumed that the vehicle stops at the time point ta1. Further, FIG. 57 (b-3) assumes a case where the reserved number of the general drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-3), it is assumed that the open symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point ta1 and the opening / closing door 14b is changed to the operation. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening / closing door 14b ends at the time point ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process for starting a new variation display is executed immediately after the time point ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-3), the gaming state at the time point ta2 is the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after the time point ta2 is the fluctuation time Hb.

FIG. 57 (b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In FIG. 57 (b-4), similarly to FIG. 57 (b-3) described above, the number of pending drawing lottery is added to the numerical value “1” before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display is stopped, and the opening / closing door 14b is shown. It is assumed that the operation of is completed at the time point ta2. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-4), the low-probability time-saving gaming state is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at the time point tx before the time point when the normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after the time point ta2). In terms of transition, it differs from the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-3) described above. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-4) assumes a case where the opening / closing door 14b shifts from the low-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state during the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening / closing door 14b starts operating in the time-saving gaming state and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state, the opening / closing door 14b continues to operate in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Db of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of the change of the normal symbol is not changed even if the operation mode Db shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening / closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the already determined operating mode of the opening / closing door is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after the time point ta2, the hit determination random number value acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at the time point ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time saving game state. Further, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the fluctuation time Ha is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are other views for explaining the relationship between the period in which the ordinary symbol display device 22 changes the ordinary symbol and the period in which the opening / closing door 14b operates. In addition, in each of the above figures, in addition to the period in which the normal symbol fluctuates and the period in which the opening / closing door 14b is operated, the gaming state at each time point is shown (similar to FIG. 31 above).

FIG. 58A is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58 (a), it is assumed that the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is changed to the time-saving gaming state at the time point tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Db immediately after the time point ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the non-time saving gaming state, if the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the operation mode Db when the open symbol is stopped and displayed, the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the operation mode Db. The door.

FIG. 58B is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58 (b), it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state is changed to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at the time point tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Da immediately after the time point ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the time-saving gaming state, if the open symbol is in the non-time-saving gaming state when the open symbol is stopped and displayed, the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the operation mode Da. The door.

FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state ends when 1000 games are executed. Further, if the jackpot game is won, the second short-time game state may end before the number of games reaches 1000 times. FIG. 59 (a) shows a specific example in which the second short-time game state ends when the big hit game is won.

FIG. 59 (a) shows the period during which the second time-shortened gaming state is activated, and the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-shortened gaming state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59A shows the period during which the first time-saving gaming state is activated and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 59 (a) shows a period of the jackpot game (including an opening period and an ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59 (a), it is assumed that the big hit game starts at the time point tb1 in the second time-saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M2 immediately before the time point tb1 is a numerical value "800". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at time point tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the second short game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59 (a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at the time point tb2. In the above case, at the time point tb2, the initial value "100" is set for the remaining number of times M1 of the first time saving game state, and the first time saving gaming state is started. Further, when the big hit game is completed, the second time saving game state is not restarted.

FIG. 59B is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the third time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, when the game is executed 100 times or 1000 times, the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, the third short-time game state may end when the big hit game is won. FIG. 59 (b) shows a specific example in which the third time-saving game state ends when the big hit game is won.

FIG. 59 (b) shows the period during which the third time-shortened gaming state is activated, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-shortened gaming state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59 (b) shows the period during which the first time-shortened gaming state is activated and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-shortened gaming state. Further, FIG. 59 (b) shows a period of the jackpot game (including an opening period and an ending period). ..

In the specific example of FIG. 59 (b), it is assumed that the big hit game starts at the time point ct1 in the third time-shortened game state. Further, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before the time point ct1 is a numerical value "10". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at the time point ct1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the third short game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59 (b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at the time point ct2. In the above case, at the time point ct2, the initial value "100" is set for the remaining number of times M1 of the first time saving game state, and the first time saving gaming state is started. Further, when the big hit game is completed, the third time saving game state is not restarted.

By the way, the first short game state ends with 100 games. Further, when the low-probability gaming state continues for 800 games, the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above configuration, since the first time-shortening gaming state ends before the second time-shortening gaming state starts, there is no period during which the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are operated in duplicate. However, the configuration may be such that a period in which the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are operated in an overlapping manner may occur. For example, a configuration in which a value larger than "800 times" can be set as the initial value of the remaining number of times M1 in the first short game state can be considered. In the above configuration, in the low-probability gaming state after the first time-shortening gaming state reaches 800 times, the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-shortening gaming state are operated in an overlapping manner.

Further, in the time-saving game state including the first time-saving game state, even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the state does not shift to the third time-saving game state. In the above configuration, there is no period during which the first time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state are operated in an overlapping manner. However, there may be a configuration in which a period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are operated in an overlapping manner may occur. For example, when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the first time-saving game state, it is conceivable that the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are operated in duplicate in the subsequent period. As will be described in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may operate in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 59 (c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in the case where the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state are operated in an overlapping manner. FIG. 59 (c) shows a period during which the second time-saving gaming state is activated and a period during which the third time-saving gaming state is activated. Further, FIG. 59 (c) shows the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-shortened gaming state, the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-shortened gaming state, and the cumulative number of times m at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at the time point td1 in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second short game state is activated from the time point td1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state is a numerical value "X" (however, 0 <X <1000) immediately after the second time-saving game state starts. do.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), in the period after the time point td1, both the second time-shortened gaming state and the third time-shortened gaming state are operated. Further, in the period in which both the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state are operated, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and the remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59 (c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted from the numerical value “0” at the time point td2. In the above case, the third time saving game state ends at the time point td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59 (c), the remaining number of times M2 (1000-X) at the time point td2 is the numerical value “1” or more. In the above specific example, at the time point td2, the third time-saving gaming state ends, while the second time-saving gaming state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59 (c), at the time point td3 after the time point td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the second time saving game state ends.

In the above third embodiment, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of operation n, the second time-saving game state is activated even in the third time-saving game state. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in which the cumulative number of times m has reached the number of operations n, the inconvenience that the player is excessively disadvantaged is suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the second time-saving gaming state does not operate. Further, in the third embodiment, in the period in which the two time-saving gaming states (the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state) are operated in an overlapping manner, the remaining number of times of both time-saving gaming states is subtracted. Therefore, for example, in a period in which two time-saving game states are operated in an overlapping manner, the subtraction of the remaining number of games in one time-saving game state is stopped, and after the other time-saving game state is completed, the one time-saving game state is changed. Compared with the configuration of restarting, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of excessively prolonging the time-saving gaming state is suppressed.

Further, as described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the time when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (the time of the wait period), and the operation mode of the opening / closing door 14b when the normal symbol is won in the lottery are set. It is common in each time-saving game state. That is, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 14b is common to each time-saving gaming state.

It is assumed that the opening mode of the opening / closing door 14b is different in each time-saving gaming state. In the above inverse proportion, when the time-saving gaming states overlap, the problem is which mode of opening the time-saving gaming state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

Further, in the above inverse proportion, when one of the time-saving gaming states ends and the other time-saving gaming state continues after the time-saving gaming states overlap, a configuration is adopted in which the opening mode of the opening / closing door 14b changes. Is assumed. For example, in the above inverse proportion, it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state A (opening mode is open mode KA) and the time-saving gaming state B (opening mode is opening mode KB) overlap. Further, in the above case, during the period in which the time-saving gaming state A and the time-saving gaming state B overlap, the opening / closing door 14b is controlled by the opening mode KA of the time-saving gaming state A. Further, it is assumed that after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues. In the above case, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 14b changes from the opening mode KA to the opening mode KB.

In the above inverse proportion, since the opening mode changes even though the time-saving gaming state continues, there may be an inconvenience that some players feel a sense of discomfort. According to the third embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed. In the above-mentioned inverse proportion, when the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the opening / closing door 14b is opened in the subsequent time-saving game state B. The configuration may be controlled by the opening mode KA. In the above configuration, the opening mode does not change when the time-saving gaming state A ends, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

60 (a) to 60 (c) are diagrams for explaining aspects (lighting and extinguishing) of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving gaming state. As described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on in the time-saving gaming state, and is turned off when the time-saving gaming state ends and the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is entered. Further, various external information signals are output from the gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The above-mentioned various external information signals include advantageous period signals.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening period), at the start of the second short game state, and at the start of the third short game state, and then changes to the low probability non-short game state. It is maintained in the ON state until the transition. It is also said that the above-mentioned advantageous period signal is turned on in a game state (big hit game, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) in which it is advantageous to play right-handed rather than left-handed.

60 (a) to 60 (c) show the state (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each time point. Further, FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c) show the cumulative number of times m at each time point. When the small hit game is executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in the OFF state or temporarily turned on.

FIG. 60A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the aspect of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-shortening gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 60A, it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at the time point te1 and the game shifts to the second time-shortening gaming state. As shown in FIG. 60A, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the specific example of FIG. 60 (a) above, the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting at the time point te1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting substantially at the same time as the start of the second short game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number of times m is determined when the special symbol is stopped (processing when the special symbol is stopped), and immediately after that, the second time saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the second time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol is stopped), and immediately after turning on the second time saving flag (almost simultaneously), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the second time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning the second time saving flag in the ON state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns on the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. ..

In the specific example of FIG. 60 (a), it is assumed that 1000 games are executed and the second time-saving game state ends at the time point te2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started from the time point te2. The above time point te2 is the time point when the special symbol is stopped in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on until the special symbol is stopped in the 1000th game in the second short-time game state, and then turned off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol is stopped in the 1000th game in the second time-shortening game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time reduction transition determination process is executed before the time reduction end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state. In the above case, at the time when the third time reduction transition determination process is executed, the second time reduction game state is set (the second time reduction flag is ON state). Further, in the third time saving transition determination process, the transition to the third time saving gaming state is not performed except in the low probability non-time saving state. Therefore, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, the game does not shift to the third time saving game state (the time saving symbol becomes invalid).

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the third embodiment, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, the process does not shift to the third time saving game state (low probability non-time saving game). (Transition to the state), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off, and the advantageous period signal is turned off. However, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time reduction transition determination process may be executed after the time reduction end determination process. In the above configuration, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, the process shifts to the third time saving game state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the end of the second short game state. ..

FIG. 60B is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the aspect of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the third time-shortening gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 60 (b), it is assumed that the time saving symbol stops at the time point tf1 and shifts to the third time saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 60 (c), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state before shifting to the third time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the specific example of FIG. 60 (b) above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up at the time point tf1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up substantially at the same time as the start of the third short game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped when the special symbol is stopped (processing when the special symbol is stopped), and immediately after that, the third time saving flag is changed to the ON state. .. The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the third time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol is stopped), and immediately after turning on the third time saving flag (almost simultaneously), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the third time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning the third time saving flag in the ON state. The main CPU 111 turns on the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of shifting to the third time-shortened gaming state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60 (b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time-saving symbols is stopped and displayed at the time point tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 in the third short game state is "100 times". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (b), it is assumed that 100 games are executed and the third time-saving game state ends at the time point tf2. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60B, when the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "1000" at the time point tf2 when the 100th game of the third time-saving game state is completed (the transition trigger of the second time-saving game state is (In the case of non-establishment) is assumed. In the above case, the low-probability non-time saving gaming state is started from the time point tf2. The above time point tf2 is the time point when the special symbol (however, the big hit symbol is excluded) is stopped in the 100th game in the third time-shortened game state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60 (b), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on until the special symbol is stopped in the 100th game in the third time-shortened game state, and then turned off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol is stopped in the 100th game in the third time-shortening game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, the third time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the third time saving game state, as in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state. The right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the advantageous period signal is turned off without shifting to the gaming state (shifting to the low-probability non-time saving gaming state). The main CPU 111 turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the end of the third time-shortening game state.

FIG. 60 (c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the aspect of the right-handed ramp 28 before and after the third time-shortening gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 60 (c), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (time-saving symbol) is stopped at the time point tg1 and the game shifts to the third time-saving gaming state, as in the above-mentioned FIG. 60 (b). However, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (b) described above, it is assumed that the transition trigger of the second time-saving game state is not established at the time point tf2 when the third time-saving game state ends, but FIG. 60 (c) shows. In a specific example, it is assumed that a transition opportunity for the second time-saving gaming state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (c), the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "1000" at the time point tg2 which is the end time point of the final game in the third time-shortened game state. In the above specific example, the second time reduction flag is changed to the ON state in the second time reduction transition determination process immediately before the third time reduction flag is changed to the OFF state in the time reduction end determination process. Further, in the time reduction end determination process immediately after the second time reduction transition determination process, the third time reduction flag changes to the OFF state. In the above case, before and after the time point tg, the period in which both the second time saving flag and the third time saving flag are in the OFF state does not occur. Therefore, before and after the time point tg2, the right-handed lamp 28 is maintained in a lit state, and the external information signal is maintained in an ON state.

It should be noted that the advantageous period signal may be temporarily changed to the OFF state immediately after the time point tg2. With the above configuration, even when the second time-shortened gaming state starts at the end of the third time-shortened gaming state, it is possible to grasp from the advantageous period signal that the third time-shortened gaming state has ended. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends and the second time-saving game state starts, a configuration may be configured in which it is notified that right-handed striking should be continued. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified that the third time-saving game state has ended and that the second time-saving game state has started. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends in the middle of the second time-saving game state, a configuration may be configured in which the player is notified that right-handed striking should be continued.

FIGS. 61 (a-1) to 61 (a-3) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed when the time-saving gaming state is started. FIGS. 61 (a-1) to 61 (a-3) show the effect executed at each time point, the period during which the effect symbol GA is displayed, and the background image displayed on the image display device 31 at each time point. GH is shown.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving gaming state is started, the inrush image GT, the prevention image GQ2, and the warning image GQ2, which will be described later, are displayed. The inrush image GT is an image for notifying that the time-saving gaming state is started (see FIGS. 61 (b-1) to 61 (b-3) described later). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card (membership card, visitor card) inserted into the gaming device (see FIG. 61 (b-1) described later). Further, the warning image GQ2 is an image for warning the game dependence (see FIG. 61 (b-2) described later). FIGS. 61 (a-1) to 61 (a-3) show a period during which the inrush image GT, the prevention image GQ2, and the warning image GQ2 are displayed.

FIG. 61 (a-1) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the first time-saving gaming state is started among the time-saving gaming states. FIG. 61 (a-1) shows, in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the first time-shortened gaming state, each image displayed in the jackpot game before shifting to the first time-saving gaming state. As described above, the jackpot game is composed of an "opening period", a "round period" and an "ending period". In the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-1), it is assumed that the ending period of the jackpot game starts (the round period ends) at the time point th1 and the ending period ends at the time point th2.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), during the round period of the big hit game, the big hit middle effect is executed. In the jackpot production, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. Further, in the big hit middle effect, the big hit middle background image is displayed among the background image GH. The big hit medium background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the above-mentioned moving image.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), the effect symbol GA is not displayed in the jackpot game. Further, in the big hit game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are not displayed. However, in the big hit game, the effect symbol GA may be hidden, while the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD may be displayed. During the round period after the jackpot game, the inrush image GT, the prevention image GQ2, and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), during the ending period of the jackpot game (the period from the time point th1 to the time point th2), the time saving rush effect is executed. In the time-saving rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and it is notified that the time-saving game state (in the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-1), the first time-saving game state) is entered. In the above time-saving rushing effect, the background image GHz at the time of rushing is displayed among the background image GH.

Further, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed during the period in which the time saving rush effect is executed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time saving rush effect is started. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the time saving rush effect, the warning image GQ2 is displayed instead of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed.

The period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during the display period (all or part) of the prevention image GQ2. Further, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving gaming state, or the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving gaming state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state is started, and the time-saving medium-time effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), when the first time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA is displayed. Further, when the first time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the hold number image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed instead of the rushing background image GHz.

FIG. 61 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the second time saving game state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-2), in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the low-probability non-short-time gaming state before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state is shown. Shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-2), it is assumed that the game shifts to the second time-shortening gaming state at the time point ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal medium effect is executed. Specifically, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, the loss variation effect in which the loss symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. In the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, a loss variation effect different from other low-probability non-time-saving game states may be executed. In the low-probability non-time saving game state, the above-mentioned effect symbol GAx is displayed. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned normal background image GHx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), when the second time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect is executed. When the above time-saving rushing effect is started, the rushing background image GHz is displayed instead of the normal background image GHx, and the rushing image GT is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect, the effect symbol GAy is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time saving game state is executed (whether or not there is a hold number at the time of transition to the second time saving game state). As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), the time saving rush effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the time saving medium effect is executed. The time-saving medium effect is an effect according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the time-saving background image GHy according to the variation mode of the effect symbol GA is displayed. When the second time saving game state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time saving rushing effect and the time saving medium effect.

In the third embodiment, the special symbol may be variablely displayed and the effect symbol GA may be variablely displayed in the time-saving rush effect when shifting to the second time-saving game state. In consideration of the above circumstances, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving medium-time effect may be displayed in the time-saving rush effect. As understood from the above description, the "background image" displayed at the time of transition to the "second gaming state" of the present invention is a concept including both the background image GHz at the time of entry and the time-saving background image GHy.

FIG. 61 (a-3) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the third time saving game state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-3), in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the low-probability non-short-time gaming state before shifting to the third time-saving gaming state is shown. Shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-3), it is assumed that the game shifts to the third time-shortening gaming state at the time point tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal medium effect is executed. Specifically, in the game of shifting to the third time saving game state, the time saving transition effect in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), when the third time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect is executed. The above-mentioned time-saving rush effect is executed, for example, for a predetermined time. When the above time-saving rushing effect is started, the rushing background image GHz is displayed instead of the normal background image GHx, and the rushing image GT is displayed.

In the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GAy is displayed. In the above time-saving rush effect, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the hold number image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the third time saving game state is executed (whether or not there is a hold number at the time of transition to the third time saving game state).

By the way, the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started is executed during the ending period of the big hit game. Therefore, it is less necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD. On the other hand, the period in which the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started is not the ending period of the big hit game. Therefore, it is highly necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD.

It is assumed that the prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to the above-mentioned images (effect image GA, etc.) in the time reduction rush effect when the second time reduction game state or the third time reduction game state is started. With the above configuration, the inconvenience that the number of images displayed on the image display device 31 is excessive is likely to occur. Further, the above inconvenience may occur even when a configuration in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed is adopted in the time saving rushing effect when the second time saving gaming state or the third time saving gaming state is started.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the prevention image GQ2 is used in the time saving rushing effect when the second time saving gaming state is started and the time saving rushing effect when the third time saving gaming state is started. Is not displayed. In addition, the warning image GQ2 is not displayed in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started and the time saving rushing effect when the third time saving game state is started. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

In addition, in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started, or in the time saving rushing effect when the third time saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga is displayed and the display of the effect symbol GA is omitted. It may be configured as such. According to the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-mentioned inconvenience is particularly remarkable.

FIG. 61 (b-1) and FIG. 61 (b-2) are simulated views of the screen displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the first time-saving gaming state is started. Specifically, FIG. 61 (b-1) is a simulated view of a screen on which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed. Further, FIG. 61 (b-2) is a simulated view of a screen on which the warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 61 (b-1) and 61 (b-2), the inrush image GT is displayed on each of the above screens. In addition, a right-handed image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. The right-handed image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 during the period from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first short-time game state.

FIG. 61 (b-3) is a simulated screen of a screen displayed in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 61 (b-3), the rush image GT is displayed in the time-saving rushing effect when the second time-saving gaming state starts. Further, in the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the hold number image GD are displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 61 (b-3), it is assumed that the number of holdings is 0. If the number of holdings is one or more, the above-mentioned holding image GB is displayed in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started.

In the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is displayed as in the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started. Further, in the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, the hold number image GD, and the hold image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, various images are displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the above-mentioned images (rush image GT, etc.) in accordance with the operation of the time-saving gaming state. Each of the other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63 below.

FIG. 62A is a simulated screen of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving gaming state is started. As described above, in the second short game state, various images including the right-handed image Gsy are displayed. Further, when the second short game state is started, the right-handed start image GR shown in FIG. 62 (a) is displayed. The right-handed start image GR is displayed after the above-mentioned inrush image GT (see FIG. 61 (b-3)) is displayed. However, the display period of the right-handed start image GR and the display period of the inrush image GT may all or partly overlap.

The right-handed start image GR is an image for notifying that the game should be played by right-handed, as in the case of the right-handed image Gsy. However, the right-handed start image GR is displayed larger than the right-handed image Gsy. Further, the right-handed image Gsy is displayed near the upper right corner of the screen, while the right-handed start image GR is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the right-handed start image GR is displayed (on the front side) in preference to the effect symbol GAy. According to the above-mentioned right-handed start image GR, it becomes easy for the player to surely recognize that the right-handed game should be started. Further, the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then disappears. Further, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the right-handed start image GR. For example, the voice "right-handed" is output.

In the third embodiment, the right-handed start image GR is displayed and the voice of "right-handed" is output regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after the transition to the second short-time game state. That is, even if the number of holdings is 0 at the time of shifting to the second short-time gaming state, the right-handed image GR is displayed and the voice "right-handed" is output. Further, even if the number of holdings is 0 at the time of shifting to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving background image GHy in the time-saving game state is displayed.

In the second short game state, a predetermined BGM is output. The output of the above BGM is started with the start of the second time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after the transition to the second time-saving game state. However, if the non-gaming period continues for a predetermined time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0", and the BGM cannot be heard.

In the specific example of FIG. 62A, it is assumed that the number of holdings is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second short game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. In the period when the right-handed start image GR is displayed, the effect symbol GA may be hidden (small symbol Ga may be continuously displayed).

When the third time-shortened game state is started, the right-handed image Gsy is displayed and the right-handed start image GR is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations, as in the case where the second time-shortened game state is started. A sound instructing that the game should be played by right-handed is output, the output of the BGM in the third time-saving game state is started, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed. Further, during the period in which the right-handed start image GR in the third short game state is displayed, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga corresponding to the lost symbol are displayed, whereas immediately after the start of the third time-saving game state, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the time-saving symbol is displayed. And the small symbol Ga is displayed.

FIG. 62B is a simulated screen of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends and the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is entered. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the left-handed image Gsx is displayed immediately after the end of the second short game state. The above-mentioned left-handed image Gsx is an image instructing that the game should be played by left-handed, and is displayed in place of the above-mentioned right-handed image Gsy. Further, the left-handed image Gsx is displayed at a position common to the right-handed image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the left-handed start image GL is displayed immediately after the end of the second short game state. The left-handed start image GL is an image for notifying that the game should be played by left-handed, as in the case of the left-handed image Gsx. However, the left-handed start image GL is displayed larger than the left-handed image Gsx. Further, the left-handed image Gsx is displayed near the upper right corner of the screen, while the left-handed start image GL is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the left-handed start image GL is displayed (on the front side) in preference to the effect symbol GAy. According to the above-mentioned left-handed start image GL, it becomes easy for the player to surely recognize that the left-handed game should be started. Further, the left-handed start image GL is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the end of the second short game state, and then disappears. Further, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the left-handed start image GL. For example, the voice "Please return to left-handed" is output.

In the third embodiment, the left-handed start image GL is displayed and the voice "Please return to left-handed" is displayed regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after the end of the second short-time game state. It is output. That is, even if the number of holdings is 0 at the end of the second short game state, the left-handed image GL is displayed and the voice "Please return to left-handed" is output. Further, even if the number of holdings is 0 at the end of the second time-saving game state, the normal background image GHx of the non-time-saving game state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62A, it is assumed that the number of holdings is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second short game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed.

Even at the end of the third time-shortened game state, the left-handed start image GL is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the number of holdings, as in the case of the end of the second time-shortened game state, instructing that the game should be played by left-handed. Sound is output and a normal background image GHx is displayed.

FIG. 63A is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The above result image GP is an image that displays information on profits acquired in the period when the period advantageous to the player ends. For example, the number of big hit games and the total number of prize balls paid out in the period from the first winning of the big hit game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (the above-mentioned advantageous period) are The result image is displayed on the GP.

In the specific example of FIG. 63 (a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is won three times in the advantageous period and 4515 prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP of the third embodiment does not include the prize balls paid out by winning the game balls in the starting openings (13, 14) and the general winning openings 18. However, the prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into the general prize opening 18 may be included in the number of prize balls displayed on the result image GP.

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, the result image GP is displayed when the first time-saving gaming state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63 (b), it is assumed that the final game in the first time-shortening game state is started at the time point tk1 and the game ends at the time point tk3. In the above case, the first time-saving game state ends at the time point tk3, and the game shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 63 (b), it is assumed that the big hit lottery of the final game in the first time-saving game state is a loss. FIG. 63 (b) shows the time point tk2 at which the effect symbol GAy corresponding to the lost symbol is temporarily stopped in the final game in the first time-shortening gaming state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 63 (b), the result image GP is displayed immediately after the above-mentioned time point tk2. As can be seen from FIG. 63 (a) above, during the period when the result image GP is displayed, the small symbol Ga is displayed and the effect symbol GA is hidden. Further, the above result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time-saving game state is completed.

It is assumed that the result image GP is displayed in inverse proportion to the end of the second short game state. As described above, the second short game state operates without the intervention of the big hit game. Further, in the short-time game state, the game ball does not win in principle to the winning openings (first major winning opening 16 and second major winning opening 17) other than the starting opening (13, 14) and the general winning opening 18. Therefore, in the above-mentioned inverse proportion, if the jackpot game is not won in the second short-time game state, the number of jackpot games displayed on the result image GP is "0 times", and the number of prize balls paid out is "0". ". When the above result image GP is displayed, there may be an inconvenience that the motivation for the game is reduced depending on the player.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. FIG. 63 (c) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the end of the second short game state. In FIG. 63 (c), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state ends at the time point tl and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the end of the second short game state.

Further, the above-mentioned inconvenience also occurs in the inverse proportion in which the result image GP is displayed when the third short game state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. FIG. 63 (d) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the end of the third short game state. In FIG. 63 (c), it is assumed that the third time-saving game state ends at the time point tm and the game shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 63 (d), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the end of the third short game state. At the end of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, for example, an image displaying a message "time reduction end" may be displayed.

64 (a) to 64 (c) are diagrams for explaining the counting period of the base value in the third embodiment. As described above, the base value calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are added during the counting period. That is, the base value is updated during the counting period.

FIG. 64A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 64 (a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variation display of the special symbol) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at the time point tn1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (a), it is assumed that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the 800th game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point tn2, and the cumulative number of times m reaches the numerical value "800". In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before the time point tn2 is the counting period. Further, the second time-shortening gaming state after the time point tn2 becomes the non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64 (a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the second short-time game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (a), it is assumed that the final game in the second time-shortened game state is started at the time point tn3, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point tn4, and the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is set after the time point tn4. Further, the counting period is restarted from the time point tn4.

FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the start of the third time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 64 (b), it is assumed that the game in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started at the time point to 1 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (b), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point to 2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before the time point to 2 is the counting period. In addition, the third time-shortening gaming state after the time point to 2 becomes the non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64 (b), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (b), it is assumed that the final game in the third time-shortened game state is started at the time point to 3, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point to 4, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64 (b), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving game state is set after the time point to4. Further, the counting period is restarted from the time point to4. In the third embodiment, if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the final game in the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted as in the case where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the final game in the third short game state, the measurement period is restarted after the small hit game is completed.

FIG. 64 (c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after the start of the third time-shortening gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that the game in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started at the time point tp1 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point tp2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before the time point tp2 is the counting period. In addition, the third time-shortening gaming state after the time point tp2 becomes the non-counting period (similar to FIG. 64 (b) described above).

In the specific example of FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that the final game in the third time-shortened game state is started at the time point tp3, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed at the time point tp4, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is set after the time point tp4. That is, the non-counting period is continued even after the time point tp4. When the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period is continued even if the time-saving symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. Further, as described above, the first time-saving gaming state is a non-counting period. Similar to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-shortened game state, when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the first time-shortened game state, after that. , The non-counting period continues.

Each of the configurations of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above can be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment as well. For example, the update time (at the start of the game) of the game count image GE in the third embodiment may be set at the end of the game as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the remaining number image GN may be displayed together with the game number image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be appropriately set. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same opportunity as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (d)). In the third embodiment, there is a possibility of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state by the time the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the third time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times image GN may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the configuration suggesting that the remaining number of times N is deferred may be used. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN and the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment under the same conditions as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the table scenario S may be set as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and a immediately preceding mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment when the second time-saving gaming state is started.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the game in which the remaining number N is subtracted from the numerical value “0” may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-shortening game state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-saving game state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image (shielded image GF, etc.) displayed in the game is the scenario setting period. The configuration may be different depending on the scenario unset period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-shortening game state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-saving game state is different between the Nario setting period and the scenario unset period, each image displayed in the game is divided into the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period. It may have a different configuration. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the first game after the end of the second short game state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-shortening gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. Further, in a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is different between the first time-shortening game state and the second time-shortening gaming state, it is preferable that the average fluctuation time of the special figure is shorter in the second time-shortening gaming state than in the first time-shortening gaming state. be. Further, it is preferable that the immediate hitting effect is more easily executed in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state.

In the third embodiment, the area in which the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or common between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. Further, when the power is turned off / on during the activated period of the third embodiment, the configuration may be such that the activation period is notified as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the second time-saving gaming state is mounted in the same configuration as the first embodiment, the modified example of FIG. 25 (b-1), and the modified example shown in FIG. 25 (b-2). It may be configured to display the fact that it is.

<Fourth Embodiment>
65 (a) and 65 (b) are diagrams for explaining the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned start prize designation command, the first information J1 related to the execution of the jackpot game specified by the preliminary judgment of the judgment information, and the second game state specified by the preliminary judgment of the judgment information are performed. An information command indicating the second information J2 related to the transition of the above is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information command is generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when the start winning is won during the period when the number of holds is less than the upper limit.

FIG. 65A is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a special symbol determination random value value determined to be a "big hit" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above-mentioned first information J1, it can grasp that the big hit game is executed thereafter.

Further, when the special symbol determination random value value determined to be "missing" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. The above-mentioned second information J2 indicates the cumulative number m in the game executed by the start winning prize. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above-mentioned second information J2, the result of the game executed by the start winning prize that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is "missing", and in the game. The cumulative number of times m can be grasped. The sub CPU 121 of the second embodiment determines the look-ahead effect according to the information (first information J1, second information J2) indicated by the information command. The pre-reading effect described above includes the specific effect X1 and the specific effect X2, which will be described later.

FIG. 65B is a diagram for explaining the specific effect X1 and the specific effect X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the mode (color) of the reserved image GB corresponding to the game (game that wins the jackpot) executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1, is the said. It changes before the start of the game (similar to the above-mentioned pending change effect). According to the above configuration, the specific effect X1 notifies in advance that the jackpot will be won before the game in which the jackpot is won.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, when the sub CPU 121 receives the information command indicating the second information J2, the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, the numerical value "790"). Judge whether or not. If the cumulative number of times m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the sub CPU 121 determines the specific effect X2 by lottery. On the other hand, when the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is less than the threshold value, the sub CPU 121 does not determine the specific effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the mode of the reserved image GB corresponding to the game executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (described above). Similar to the pending change effect). According to the above-mentioned specific effect X2, the player is notified that the number of games up to the second time-saving game state is relatively small. The aspect of the reserved image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the aspect of the reserved image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or common.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving rush effect for notifying that fact is executed. In the time-saving rush effect of the second embodiment, an image common to each image displayed in the time-saving rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed. Specifically, in the time-saving rush effect, in addition to the rush image GT, the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed. In the time-saving rush effect in the second embodiment, a part of the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed. Also in the above-mentioned second embodiment, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification example>
Each of the above forms is variously transformed. Specific modes of modification are illustrated below. Two or more embodiments arbitrarily selected from the following examples may be merged as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the update timing of the numbers of the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN can be appropriately changed. For example, the numbers of the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN may be updated at the start of the game. Further, the number of the game count image GE may be updated at the start of the game, and the number of the remaining number image GN may be updated at the end of the game. Similarly, the number of the game count image GE may be updated at the end of the game, and the number of the remaining number image GN may be updated at the start of the game.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19A) before the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right depending on the fact that a specific instruction condition is satisfied. It may be configured to be instructed to hit. For example, the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 11. Further, the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player touches the operation handle 11.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration for notifying that the second time-shortened gaming state has been activated can be appropriately changed. For example, instead of the configuration in which the game count image GE shown in FIG. 23C described above is displayed in the activated period, the actual number of games from the jackpot game may be displayed in the activated period. That is, in the activated period, the number of the game count image GE may be added and displayed from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of the game count image GE is "1800" or more, it is substantially notified that the activation period has been started. Even when the above configuration is adopted, it is preferable that the game count image GE is hidden in the second short game state.

(4) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the time for displaying the stationary notification image GI is not limited to the early stage of the game. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the middle of the game or at the end of the game. For example, the deferred notification image GI may be displayed when the reach effect is started, or the deferred notification image GI may be displayed during the fixed period. Further, the configuration may be such that at what point in the game the stationary notification image GI is displayed is determined by lottery. Further, the stationary notification image GI may be continuously displayed over a plurality of (for example, 10 times) games.

(5) In each of the above-described modes, in the game (51st and 101st games) in which the deferred notification image GI can be displayed, the deferred notification is always satisfied when the predetermined display condition (N ≦ 200) is satisfied. The image GI was displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the deferred notification image GI can be displayed, the deferred notification image GI is displayed on condition that a predetermined display condition is satisfied and a predetermined lottery is won. May be.

Further, the deferred notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number N, provided that the lottery is won during the period when the remaining number N is deferred. In the above configuration, when the deferred notification image GI is displayed (when the deferment is notified), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of games up to the second time-saving game state, or the remaining number of games may be directly notified. The configuration may be such that the number of games up to the second time-shortening game state is suggested without directly displaying the number of times N. Further, the configuration may be such that it is suggested whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred.

For example, it is assumed that a configuration is provided with a predetermined lamp (hereinafter referred to as “specific lamp”). The above-mentioned specific lamps are usually lit in a manner corresponding to the current effect. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the first special mode depends on whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred and the current value of the remaining number of times N. Alternatively, it may be lit in the second special mode. Specifically, the specific lamp is more likely to light in the first special mode or the second special mode when the remaining number of times N is deferred as compared with the case where the remaining number of times N is deferred. Further, when the remaining number of times N is deferred and is equal to or less than a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "200"), the remaining number of times N is deferred and is larger than the predetermined numerical value. 2 The specific lamp is easy to light in a special mode. According to the above configuration, the fun of notifying whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred is improved.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of set values having different ball ejection rates may be provided. Specifically, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting value of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting changing operation. A jackpot determination table is provided for each set value, and when the set value is changed, the jackpot winning probability changes.

In the above modification, the effect of suggesting the set value (hereinafter referred to as “suggestion effect”) may be a structure that can be executed. However, in a configuration in which an effect in which one type of setting value is specified can be executed, there is a possibility that the player's gambling spirit may be significantly agitated. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the suggestion effect, it is notified that there is a high possibility that it is one of a plurality of types of setting values among all the setting values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six types of setting values, from the setting value "1" to the setting value "6", are provided. In the above configuration, the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is more likely to be an odd number (1, 3, 5) than the even number (2, 4, 6) setting value, and the even number than the odd number setting value. It is conceivable to provide a suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is likely to be. Further, a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value "4 to 6" (high setting) is more likely than the set value "1 to 3" (low setting) may be provided. Further, a suggestion effect may be provided in which the set value "6" is rich (but not fixed). When the above modification is adopted, the number of games up to the second time-shortening game state is deterministically notified by the remaining number of times image GN, whereas the set value is not deterministically notified by the suggestion effect. However, in the modified example, a suggestion effect in which one set value is determined may be executed.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time-saving gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game may be changed according to the gaming state in which the jackpot is won, in addition to the jackpot symbol. For example, it is assumed that the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state A (the number of games is large), are provided. Further, in the above configuration, when the jackpot game is won in the non-time saving game state, the probability of shifting to the time saving game state A is about 99%, and the probability of shifting to the time saving game state B is about 1%. Further, when the jackpot game is won in the time-saving game state A, the probability of shifting to the time-saving game state B is about 50%, and the probability of shifting to the time-saving game state B is about 50%. Further, when the big hit game is won in the time-saving game state B, the game shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 100%.

Further, in the above modified example, the most advantageous time-saving gaming state may be adopted as the second time-saving gaming state. For example, in the above-mentioned specific example, a configuration in which the time-saving gaming state B is adopted as the second time-saving gaming state can be considered. However, in the above configuration, if a big hit is won immediately before the start of the second short game state, some players may have the inconvenience of feeling dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the above inconveniences are suppressed. A specific example of the configuration will be described below.

In each of the above-described modes, a normal mode and a immediately preceding mode are provided as the effect mode of the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the mode immediately before the modification, the effect of congratulating the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to the time-saving game state B is executed, while the effect of congratulating the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to the time-saving game state A is not executed. .. Further, in the modified example, the effect symbol GA is different and the background image GH is different between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode.

For example, in the normal mode, the remaining number image GN is displayed, and in the immediately preceding mode, the special remaining number image GNx is displayed instead of the remaining number image GN. The special remaining number of times image GNx displays, for example, a message "If only the remaining X is endured, the time saving B is entered!" (X indicates the number of games until the second time saving gaming state). Further, in the immediately preceding mode, an image in which a ally character and an enemy character face each other is displayed, and in each game, an effect in which each character fights is executed. In the game in which the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state B is won in the mode immediately before the modification, the effect that the ally character wins is executed, and the message "Congratulations!" Is displayed. On the other hand, in the game in which the big hit that shifts to the time-saving game state A is won, the effect that the ally character is defeated is executed, and the message "Sorry" is displayed.

Even with the above modification, the same effect as each of the above-mentioned forms can be obtained. However, also in the modified example, the fluctuation pattern determination table cannot be switched according to the number of games during the scenario unset period, as in each of the above-described embodiments. If each effect (such as an effect in which a character fights) in the immediately preceding mode is executed without switching the fluctuation pattern determination table from the normal mode, there may be a problem that an appropriate time for executing the effect cannot be secured. Therefore, even in the modified example, it is preferable that the immediately preceding mode is not provided during the scenario unset period.

(8) In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game in the non-time-saving gaming state that shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (hereinafter, simply “shifting game”) is set in the scenario setting period (Tn2 or). Tnc) and the scenario unset period (Tn1) were different. In addition, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second short-time game state is different between the scenario setting period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario unset period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second time-shortened game state (including the transition game and the first game in the second time-shortened game state) has a scenario setting period and a scenario not set. We adopted a configuration that differs depending on the period.

However, at the start of the second short game state, the variation pattern determination table common to the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may be referred to. For example, in the configuration in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the transition game in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 may be referred to in the transition game in the scenario setting period. In the above configuration, it is sufficient that the variation pattern determination table T is included in the variation pattern determination table T that can be referred to in the transition game of the scenario setting period, and a configuration other than the variation pattern determination table Tn1 may be referenced. According to the above configuration, the number of variation pattern determination tables that can be referred to at the start of the second short game state is compared with the configuration in which the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period are different. Has the advantage of being easy to reduce.

It should be noted that the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second short game state may be completely common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. According to the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of fluctuation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving game state is variably configured in the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, in the scenario setting period (Ts, Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx), the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-shortening game state is variable.

However, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving game state may be common to the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state may be a common configuration between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the 900th game (the remaining 100 times) of the second time-saving game state may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, or the end of the second time-saving game state. The variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the above game may be common.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state may be emphasized. For example, in a game in which the remaining number of times M is a numerical value "5" or more, the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white, and in a game in which the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "5", the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in red. Can be considered. Further, the remaining number of times M at which the emphasis of the remaining number of times M is started may be common or different between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white in the game in which the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "5" or more, and the remaining number of times M is less than the numerical value "5". Time saving image The number of GJ is displayed in red. On the other hand, in the second time-saving game state (1000 times), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white in the game in which the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "10" or more, and the remaining number of times M is less than the numerical value "10". The number of the time-saving image GJ may be displayed in red.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, in addition to the opportunity to win the big hit in the big hit lottery, the big hit game may be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. Further, in the above configuration, a gaming ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in a specific area in a small hit game (a so-called one-type or two-type gaming machine may be used). That is, if the small hit is won and the game ball wins a prize in the specific area in the small hit game, the big hit game may be executed. In the above modified example, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when the small hit is won, and the remaining number of times N is initialized when the game ball wins a prize in the specific area.

Further, in the modified example, the high probability gaming state is not provided, and the winning probability of a big hit is obtained when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13 and when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 14. Is common. Further, the winning probability of a small hit when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 14 is higher than the winning probability of the big hit, and when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13, the small hit is not won. Further, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state as compared with the non-time-saving game state.

In the gaming machine of the modified example, when the number of holdings in the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "remaining hold") is one or more at the end of the time-saving gaming state, in the game after the time-saving gaming state ends. There is a high probability that a small hit will be won. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, the big hit game can be executed with high probability over a maximum of four games.

In the above configuration, the above-mentioned first end effect (see FIG. 45A) may be executed during the period when the game is executed with the remaining hold. Further, in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining hold immediately after the end of the first time-shortened game state, the first end effect is executed, and in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining hold immediately after the end of the second time-shortened game state. The configuration may be such that the end effect is not executed. That is, the "at the end (at the end) of the second gaming state" of the present invention includes a period during which the game is executed with the remaining hold. Depending on the number of games in the second short game state, the probability that the big hit game will not be won in the second short game state may be about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above case, even if the design is such that the end effect is not executed in the second time-saving game state, the final game in the second time-saving game state is rarely executed. Therefore, the problem that the player feels dissatisfied is unlikely to occur because the end effect is not executed in the final game in the second short game state.

In the type 1 and type 2 gaming machines, the transition determination process (S224 in FIG. 32 and S242 in FIG. 35 (a)) for updating the remaining number of times N is the small hit game process as in the first embodiment described above. The configuration executed after (S187 in FIG. 32) is preferable. According to the above configuration, if the game ball does not win a prize in the specific area in the small hit game process, the remaining number N is updated in the transition determination process, while if the game ball wins in the specific area, the big hit game Is executed, so that the migration determination process can be omitted. Further, in one type and two types of gaming machines, the configuration may be such that the first time-saving gaming state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state via the gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of games of the gap game is four. Further, in the above-mentioned gap game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which an effect different from that of the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode is executed.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, when shifting from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving gaming state via the gap game, the left-handed image GL described above may not be displayed. Specifically, when the game is played in a normal procedure, the effect mode when shifting from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via the gap game is the time-saving mode B. In the above case, it is preferable that the left-handed image GL is not displayed when the game shifts to the gap game (non-time saving game state).

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off in the gap game. Therefore, even if the effect mode before and after the gap game does not change in the time saving mode B, it is preferable that the right-handed image GS is hidden in the gap game.

(14) In each of the above-described modes, a process of determining whether or not the start condition of the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied (hereinafter, “first determination process”) and other conditions for shifting the gaming state (for example, high). The process of determining whether or not the probability game state start condition) is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “second determination process”) may be included in a common module or may be included in separate modules.

By the way, conventionally, in a big hit game, a predetermined number of times (for example, for example) after the big hit game, provided that the game ball has passed through a specific area in the big winning opening (hereinafter, may be referred to as "V winning"). A gaming machine (so-called “V-ST machine”) capable of shifting to a high-probability (time saving) gaming state (“120 times”) is known. The present invention may be adopted for the above-mentioned gaming machines. In the above-mentioned gaming machines, in each game, the update process of the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state, the process of determining the remaining number N after the update (hereinafter, "first determination process"), and the high-probability gaming state are The update process of the remaining number of times until the end and the process of determining the remaining number of times after the update (hereinafter, "second determination process") are executed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the second determination process is executed after the first determination process. It is assumed that the first determination process is executed after the second determination process. With the above configuration, in the high-probability gaming state, there is a problem that the remaining number N until the second time-shortening gaming state is updated.

(15) When the present invention is adopted for the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if the V prize, which is a condition for shifting to the high-probability gaming state, cannot be achieved in the big hit game, the V prize is subsequently won. A configuration that shifts to a time-saving game state with the same number of games as in the case is preferable. For example, in a configuration in which a V prize is won in a big hit game, the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state of 120 times, and even if a V prize is not won in the big hit game, a configuration in which the game shifts to a low-probability time-saving game state of 120 times can be considered. ..

Further, in the modified example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the effect mode after the big hit game is common regardless of whether or not the V prize is won in the big hit game. In the above configuration, the effect mode after the big hit game is common between the case of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the low-probability time-saving gaming state. In the above modified example, each screen displayed is common between the case where the power is cut off in the high-probability time-saving game state and the recovery is performed, and the case where the power is cut off and the recovery is performed in the low-probability time-saving game state. , A configuration in which the effect mode after the return is common is preferable. That is, it is preferable that the presence or absence of the V prize in the immediately preceding jackpot game is not detected from the screen before and after the power is cut off. In the modified example as well, the player may be able to select the effect mode in the time-saving gaming state as in the first embodiment. Further, when the power is cut off in the big hit game, or when the power is cut off in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state after restoration may be controlled to the common effect mode.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the demo screen is displayed when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time, but when the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the demo screen is not displayed.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the shield image GF, the inrush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 (start image) are displayed at the start of the second short game state. The time when the above start image is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 66A is a diagram for explaining the display time of the start image in the modified example. FIG. 66A shows a period during which each start image is displayed. Further, FIG. 66A shows a transition game that shifts to the second time-shortening game state, a fixed period in the transition game, and a period in which the start image is displayed in the first game in the second time-shortening game state. Is done. FIG. 66A shows the start time point tx of the second short game state. In the modified example, as in the first embodiment described above, the second time-saving game state is started when the fixed period of the transition game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 66A, the display of the shielded image GF is started immediately after the transition game is started. Further, the shielded image GF is continuously displayed until the confirmation period is started, and is hidden at the start of the confirmation period. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the inrush image GT is displayed during the fixed period of the transition game. After that, when the confirmation period ends and the first game in the second short game state is started, the inrush image GT is hidden and the right-handed image GS3 (large right-handed image GS) is displayed. The right-handed image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined time, and then disappears.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the fixed period in each game is about 0.5 seconds. If the fixed period of the transition game in the modified example is about 0.5 seconds, there is an inconvenience that the time for displaying the inrush image GT is too short. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modified example, a configuration is adopted in which the fixed period is extended in the transition game from the game immediately before the transition game. Specifically, the fixed period of the transition game is extended to about 5 seconds. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

However, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, in order to suppress the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired, the time of one game (variable period + fixed period) does not change according to the number of games in the scenario unset period. It was adopted. In consideration of the above circumstances, even in the modified example, it is preferable that the fixed period is extended in the transition game of the scenario setting period, while the fixed period does not change in the transition game of the scenario unset period.

FIG. 66 (b-1) and FIG. 66 (b-2) are diagrams for explaining a display period of a start image in another modification. In the specific examples of FIGS. 66 (b-1) and 66 (b-2), it is assumed that the transition game ends at the time point tx and the transition to the second time-shortening game state is entered. Specifically, FIG. 66 (b-1) assumes a case where the number of holds is 1 or more at the time point tx. On the other hand, FIG. 66 (b-2) assumes a case where the number of reservations is 0 at the time point tx. The details will be described below, but in the modified example, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of holdings at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-1), when the number of reservations is one or more at the time point tx, the first game in the second time saving game state is started immediately after the time point tx. In the above case, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined time immediately after the second short game state is started. After that, the shielded image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the inrush image GT is displayed. The above inrush image GT is displayed for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-2), when the number of holdings is 0 at the time point tx, the customer waiting state is started immediately after the second time saving game state is started. In the above case, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed when the customer waiting state is started. In this modification, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed image GS3 is hidden. After that, the shielded image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and the inrush image GT is displayed. The inrush image GT is displayed for a predetermined time. As can be understood from the above description, in the modified example, the time when the right-handed image GS3 is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of holdings at the time point tx.

In the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure fluctuates. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

FIG. 66 (c) is a diagram for explaining a display period of a start image in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66 (c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at the time point tx and shifts to the second time-shortening game state. Further, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of holdings at the time point tx is 0. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the modified example, the shield image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then the inrush image GT is displayed. Further, when the transition game is completed and the customer waiting state is started, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed.

If the number of holdings is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, a customer waiting state is provided from the end of the transition game to the start of the first game of the second time-saving game state. do not have. In the above case, there is a disadvantage that the right-handed image GS3 cannot be displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modified example, if the number of holds is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, the hold is invalidated (the number of holds is set to 0). It may be adopted. In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started at the start of the second short game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. The configuration in which the number of holdings is set to 0 at the start of the second short game state is not limited to the modified example, but may be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modified examples.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the first game in the second short-time game state is started, the right-handed image GS3 is hidden. In the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure fluctuates. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

Further, the time when the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modification. For example, the shield image GF and the inrush image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the shielded image GF is displayed in the transition game, then the right-handed image GS3 is displayed during the fixed period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the inrush image GT is displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. It may be configured. The inrush image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and then the shield image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the game or in the customer waiting state. Even if the rush image GT is displayed in the transition game, the shield image GF is displayed in the fixed period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the first game in the second short-time game state. good.

The shield image GF, the inrush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or the waiting state for customers. The shield image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the inrush image GT may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The shield image GF and the inrush image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The shield image GF may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the inrush image GT and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The rush image GT and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the shield image GF may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state.

The right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the inrush image GT and the shield image GF may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The rush image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 and the shield image GF may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Further, in each of the above modified examples, in the display order of the start image displayed in the transition game, the display order of the start image displayed in the fixed period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the game in the second short game state. The display order of the images at the start of display may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modification, two or more start images may be displayed in parallel. Further, in the configuration in which the shielded image GF is displayed in the customer waiting state, it is preferable that the shielded image GF is displayed over the customer waiting state and the shielded image GF is hidden when the fluctuation of the second special figure starts. be.

(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all the start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the end of the first game in the second time-saving game state. However, the configuration may be such that the start image can be displayed until the second and subsequent games in the second short game state. For example, the time for displaying the image at the start is predetermined, and the game may be executed a plurality of times before the time elapses.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the game at the start of the second time-shortened game state (transition game, the first game in the second time-shortened game state), the start image (shielded image GF, inrush image GT, and right-handed image). (Part or all of GS3) was displayed, and then the effect symbol GA was stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second short game state (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "start game"), if the result of the big hit lottery is lost, the image at the start is displayed and then lost. The effect symbol GA corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

If the jackpot game is won in the start game, it is assumed that the start image (part or all) that is originally displayed in the start game is not displayed. With the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the success or failure of the big hit lottery in the start game is detected by the presence or absence of the display of the start image. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the modified example, a configuration is adopted in which the image at the start can be displayed regardless of the result of the big hit lottery in the game at the start.

For example, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, it is assumed that the modified example is adopted. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second short game state), the screen M1 is displayed, then the shield image GF is displayed, and the rush effect is executed (the rush image GT is displayed). , The mode selection effect is executed, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). Further, after the right-handed image GS3 is displayed, the screen is switched to the time-saving middle screen M7 (see FIG. 17A) in the second time-saving gaming state, and the effect image GA is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

In the modification, in the above first embodiment, the screen M1 is displayed regardless of the result of the big hit lottery of the game at the start, after that, the shield image GF is displayed, the rush effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is performed. It is executed and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, then the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed (similar to the first embodiment). Further, in the modified example, when the jackpot game is won in the start game, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed after the right-handed image GS3 is displayed. For example, when the right-handed image GS3 is displayed and then the screen is switched to the time-saving medium screen M7, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. After that, when the effect movable body 32 moves to the retracted position, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. That is, when a big hit is won in the game at the start, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed at once without going through the reach effect. However, in the start game, after a series of start images are displayed, after performing an effect (reach effect, etc.) that can be executed in another time reduction mode B game, the same as in the other time reduction mode B games. , The jackpot may be notified.

In the above modified example, since the predetermined start image is displayed regardless of the result of the big hit lottery, it is difficult to detect the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the start image is displayed. In the game at the start, it is preferable that the reach effect is not executed regardless of the result of the big hit lottery. Assuming that, in the configuration in which the reach effect is executed in the game at the start, the reach effect is started through the above-mentioned rush effect and mode selection effect. Therefore, it is assumed that the game at the start will be excessively prolonged. In the configuration in which the reach effect is not executed in the game at the start, there is an advantage that the above inconveniences are suppressed. Alternatively, in the start game, the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than in other games of the time saving mode B, regardless of the result of the big hit lottery. However, in the modified example, there may be a case where the start image is not displayed (for example, when the premier effect is won) in the start game won by the big hit lottery.

Further, in the start game in which the big hit is won, a part of the start image displayed in the start game of loss may be displayed and the other part may not be displayed. For example, in the game at the start of loss, it is assumed that the shield image GF, the inrush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed in this order. In the above configuration, in the start game in which the jackpot is won, the shield image GF is displayed in the same manner as in the loss start game, and the inrush image GT and the right-handed image GS3 are not displayed.

(20) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and displayed in each game. In the above configuration, in the game in which the jackpot is won, the subtraction display of the number of the remaining number image GN may be omitted because the remaining number N is not subtracted. Similarly, in the game in which the big hit is won, the remaining number M in the time-saving game state is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, when the above configuration is adopted, in the configuration in which the number of the remaining number image GN is subtracted and displayed immediately after the game is started, the result of the big hit lottery is detected depending on the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the game is started. Inconvenience may occur. Specifically, in the game in which the jackpot is won immediately after the game is started, the number of the remaining number image GN is subtracted and displayed, and in the lost game, the number of the remaining number image GN is not subtracted and displayed. At that point, it will be detected that the jackpot has been won. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and displayed regardless of the result of the big hit lottery (regardless of whether or not the remaining number of times N is subtracted). Similarly, regardless of the result of the big hit lottery (regardless of whether or not the remaining number of times M is subtracted), the configuration in which the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted and displayed is preferable.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, one type of music or a plurality of types of music corresponding to the time saving mode A may be provided. Further, the music corresponding to the time saving mode B may be one type or may be provided in a plurality of types. For example, in the first embodiment, the time-saving mode B in the first time-saving gaming state and the time-saving mode B in the second time-saving gaming state may be configured to play a common music, or different music may be played. You may. Further, the time saving mode A in the first time saving gaming state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving gaming state may have a configuration in which the music is common or may be different.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the time saving mode A in the first time saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 was referred to in the early game, and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 was referred to in the final game. In the above configuration, when the power is turned off in the time saving mode A, it is preferable that the images that can be displayed at the time of restoration are common regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table (Ta1 and Ta2). Further, even when the configuration for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table T between the early stage and the final stage is adopted in the second short game state, the power is turned off in the early stage of the second short game state and in the final stage. In some cases, a configuration in which the images that can be displayed at the time of restoration are common is preferable.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the table scenario S may be changed when a small hit is won.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state may be configured so that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can confirm at any time. For example, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the remaining number of times N is concealed during the period in which the gaming machine 1 immediately after the power is turned on can execute the game. In the above configuration, by operating the operation unit provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the information for specifying the current value of the remaining number N (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number information") is displayed. It may be adopted. As the position where the above operation unit is provided, for example, on the main control board 110 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 or (and) the image display device 21 can be adopted. Further, as a position where the operation unit is provided, for example, on the effect control board 120 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21 can be adopted.

Further, as the above operation unit, a dedicated operation unit may be newly adopted or an existing operation unit may be adopted. For example, the clear button 30 may be adopted as the operation unit. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated outside the period in which the clear operation can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. Further, the remaining number of times information may be displayed according to the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8. In the above configuration, when the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during the period when the player's operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 is invalid (for example, the period immediately after the power is turned on), the rest remains. A configuration in which the number of times information is displayed is conceivable. As with the remaining number of times information, the configuration may be such that the manager of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not it is the activated period at any time. Further, both the remaining number of times information and whether or not it is the activated period may be configured so that the manager of the gaming machine can confirm at any time.

(25) In each of the above-described modes, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in each time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state may be more disadvantageous than the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state, while the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming. The configuration may be substantially common (slightly advantageous) with the state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B are provided, and after the end of the jackpot game started with the jackpot symbol A stopped and displayed, the game is in a low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed. After the end of the big hit that started, the game shifts to a high-probability gaming state of 30 times (so-called "ST machine"). The winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/300 in the low-probability gaming state and about 1/100 in the high-probability gaming state.

Further, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the time saving game state (first time saving game state or second time saving game state), the game shifts to the time saving game state of 30 times after the end of the big hit game. The above 30 time-saving gaming states are low-probability gaming states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 60 times after the jackpot game is completed. Of the above 60 time-saving gaming states, the first 30 times are high-probability gaming states, and the latter 30 times are low-probability gaming states. That is, when a big hit is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed up to 30 times regardless of the type of the big hit symbol.

However, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving game state, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 1000 times after the end of the big hit. Further, even when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving game state, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 1000 times after the end of the big hit. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state of 1000 times, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state of 1000 times again after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state.

Further, the initial value of the remaining number N of the second time-shortened game state is a numerical value "30", and when 30 games (losses) are executed in the low-probability game state, the game shifts to the second time-shortened game state. .. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is substantially the same as the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, the second time-saving game state continues until a maximum of 500 games are executed, and then the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

In the above modified example, 500 times of the second time-saving game state are started immediately after the above-mentioned 30 times low-probability non-time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is completed. However, if the jackpot is won in the above time-saving game state, it is not possible to shift to the time-saving game state of 1000 times. Therefore, the player does not win the big hit until the second time-saving game state ends and the low-probability non-time-saving game state is entered (from the transition to the low-probability gaming state until the 530 games are completed). Play games for the purpose of doing that.

However, in the modified example, there is a case where the "third time reduction" is won in the big hit lottery in the non-time reduction game state. The winning probability of the third time reduction is, for example, about 1/300. If the player wins the third time reduction, the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure, and the game shifts to the third time reduction game state. However, if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving game state, the third time saving is not started. Similar to the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state continues for a maximum of 500 games, and the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is substantially the same as the non-time-saving game state. Further, if the big hit is won in the third time-saving game state, the process shifts to the first time-saving game state of 30 times or 60 times, as in the case of winning the big hit in the other time-saving game states. In the above configuration, in the non-time saving game state, the player plays a game for the purpose of winning a big hit before the third time saving.

According to the above modification, new playability can be provided to the player. It should be noted that a plurality of types of time-saving symbols may be provided, and the number of games in the third time-saving gaming state may change according to the type of time-saving symbols.

(26) In each of the above-described modes, a screen that can be displayed during the game period (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 23B) is displayed immediately after the recovery screen is displayed at the time of power recovery. However, in the case of a customer waiting state immediately after the recovery screen is displayed, a screen (demo screen or the like) displayed only in the customer waiting state may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above-described embodiments, the customer waiting screen may be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state. However, it is preferable that the above-mentioned mounted notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving game state.

(28) In each of the above-described modes, the average fluctuation time of the special figure may be shorter in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery, the average time of the fluctuation pattern of the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 (immediately preceding mode) is referred to is shorter than the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referred to. The configuration is suitable. In the above configuration, the average time of each game is shortened when the mode is changed from the normal mode to the immediately preceding mode. That is, the average time of each game is shortened in the period immediately before the start of the second short game state.

For example, it is assumed that the average fluctuation time of the special figure does not change between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. In the above inverse proportion, the immediately preceding mode may be prolonged depending on the determined fluctuation pattern. In the above case, the player who wants to start the second short-time gaming state at an early stage may experience the inconvenience of feeling stress. In the above-mentioned modification, since the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the immediately preceding mode is shorter than that in the normal mode, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience can be suppressed as compared with, for example, inverse proportion.

(29) In each of the above-described modes, the execution frequency of each effect in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode can be appropriately changed. By the way, depending on the player, in the immediately preceding mode, it may be desired to shift to the second time-saving game state rather than winning the big hit. In the immediately preceding mode, the above-mentioned player may feel annoyed by a production with a high expectation of a big hit (hereinafter, "high expectation production"). That is, there is an inconvenience that the high-expectation effect that the player originally has been waiting for is annoying.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the game of losing in the big hit lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to execute the high expectation effect in the mode immediately before the normal mode. For example, it is assumed that a mini-game effect in which the effect button 8 is instructed to be operated in a predetermined mode is provided as a high-expectation effect. In the above configuration, in the game of losing in the big hit lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to select the mini-game effect in the mode immediately before the normal mode. According to the modification, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. However, a configuration in which it is difficult to select a high-expectation effect other than the mini-game effect in the immediately preceding mode may be used.

(30) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first jackpot game having a first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) and the second jackpot game having a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) less than the number of first rounds. It may be provided so that the degree of expectation of winning the first big hit game is suggested by the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the second big hit game state, in the game in which the first big hit game is won, it is considered that the immediate hit effect is less likely to be executed than in the game in which the second big hit game is won.

(31) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of the time-saving gaming state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be different in each time-saving game state. Further, the BGM may be different or the effect symbol GA may be different in each time-saving game state. The time when the type of time-saving game state is notified can be set appropriately. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the type of the time-saving gaming state is notified when each time-saving gaming state is started.

As a specific example of the modification, the small symbol Ga may be displayed in the time saving rush effect regardless of which time saving gaming state is started. In the above configuration, in the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the lost symbol is displayed, and in the time saving rushing effect when the third time saving game state is started, it corresponds to the time saving symbol. The small symbol Ga to be used is displayed. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can grasp the type of the time-saving game state to be started by the small symbol Ga displayed in the time-saving rushing effect.

(32) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the time-saving rush effect in the second time-saving game state, the effect symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed, and then the rush image GT is displayed. It may be displayed. The above configuration has an advantage that the visibility of the rush image GT is improved, and it is easy to distinguish between the time-saving rushing effect in the first time-saving gaming state and the time-saving rushing effect in the second time-saving gaming state. It is sufficient if the time-saving rushing effect in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving rushing effect in the second time-saving game state can be distinguished. Any of the symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be used, and at least one of the symbols may be displayed. Similarly, in the time saving rushing effect in the third time saving game state, the effect symbol GA may be hidden, the small symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed, and then the rushing image GT may be displayed.

(33) In each of the above-described embodiments, the result image GP may be displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. The above configuration has an advantage that it is easy for the player to recognize that the second time-saving game state has ended, as compared with the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. Similarly, the result image GP may be displayed when the third short game state ends. The above configuration has an advantage that it is easy for the player to recognize that the third time-saving game state has ended, as compared with the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is effective (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), the special effect symbol GA (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving effect symbol”) is stopped and displayed when the time-saving symbol is stopped. The configuration is suitable. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is invalid, it is preferable that the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed when the time-saving symbol is stopped.

However, in a gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is invalid, the time-saving effect symbol may be stopped and displayed when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is invalid and the time-saving effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the gaming state in which the time-saving symbol is valid are different.

(35) The symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol is not limited to the above-mentioned example of each form. For example, it is assumed that the effect symbol GA includes a "special symbol" different from the numbers "1 to 9". In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol.

In the above modification, it is preferable that the special symbol out of the three symbols is stopped and displayed at the end. Further, as a special symbol, a symbol displaying a character (for example, the character string "time reduction") indicating the transition to the time saving game state is preferably adopted. Further, it is preferable that the special symbol is not included in the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol.

In the above modification, the special symbol may not be included in the effect symbol GA to be variablely displayed during the period when the reach effect is not executed, and the special symbol may be displayed during the period after the reach effect is executed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed, the special symbol may be changed and displayed. With the above configuration, even in a game in which the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed, the expectation that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed can be improved. All of the above configurations may be adopted, or some of them may be adopted.

(36) In each of the above-described modes, in the game transitioning to the second time-saving game state (final game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state), the normal effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is displayed. Instead of the above configuration, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, a special effect symbol GA may be displayed. For example, it is conceivable that the effect symbol GA displaying the characters "start of time-saving game!" Is stopped and displayed in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. However, the special effect symbol GA displayed in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state is the effect symbol GA corresponding to the time-saving symbol, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the big hit symbol, and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the small hit symbol. Distinguishable (different) configurations are preferred.

(37) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be appropriately changed. For example, the result image GP is started to be displayed when the final game of the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is completed, and then the second hold number becomes 0. The result image GP may be hidden after being subtracted and the variation display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the result image GP may be continuously displayed until the first variation display of the first special symbol display device 20 can be started.

(38) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be configured in which a limited period is not provided before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the determination information acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 13 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first determination information") is held in the second time-saving gaming state (first). Even in the case of (which can be determined in the 2 time reduction game state), the hold change effect based on the first determination information is executed in the non-time reduction game state.

However, in the configuration in which the fact that the player has the right to win the big hit is continuously notified in the second short game state, there may be an inconvenience that excessively agitates the gambling spirit of the player. Therefore, in a configuration in which a limited period is not provided before the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state, a configuration in which the hold change effect in the reserved image GB is canceled when the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is preferable. In the above configuration, the reserved image GB displayed in the special mode in the non-time saving game state is displayed in the normal mode in the second time saving game state. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved image GB displayed in the special mode immediately before the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is displayed in the normal mode in the third time-shortened gaming state.

(39) In each of the above-described embodiments, a limited period may be provided before shifting to the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is conceivable that the limited period is from the time when it is determined in advance that the player will be elected in the third time reduction to the transition to the third time reduction gaming state.

(40) In the above-described embodiment, when the player shifts to the second time-saving game state, right-handed strike is performed regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed (regardless of the number of holdings). The start image GR is displayed. Further, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a voice instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, and the BGM in the second time-saving game state is output.

Instead of the above configuration, the right-handed start image GR is displayed on condition that the first game in the second short-time game state is executed, and a voice instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output. The BGM in the second short game state may be output. Further, on condition that the first game in the third time-shortened game state is executed, the right-handed start image GR is displayed, a voice instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, and the third time-shortened game state is output. BGM may be output.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when the transition from the second time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is performed, whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed (reserved number). The left-handed start image GL was displayed (regardless of the presence or absence of). In addition, a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started was output regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state was executed.

Instead of the above configuration, the left-handed start image GL is displayed on condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, and a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started is output. It may be configured as such. Further, when shifting from the third time-saving game state to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the left-handed start image GL is displayed and the left-handed game is displayed on condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed. It may be configured to output a voice instructing that the operation should be started.

(42) In each of the above-described embodiments, in addition to the opportunity to win the big hit in the big hit lottery, the big hit game may be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area (so-called type 1 and 2 types of games). It may be a machine). In the above specific area, a game ball can be won in a small hit game. That is, when the small hit is won and the game ball wins a prize in the specific area in the small hit game, the big hit game is executed. In the above modified example, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized when the small hit is won, and the cumulative number of times m is initialized when the game ball wins a prize in the specific area.

In the above modification, the probability of winning a big hit is different depending on whether the high probability gaming state is not provided and the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13 and the game ball wins in the second starting opening 14. It is common. Further, the winning probability of a small hit when a game ball wins in the second starting port 14 is higher than the winning probability of a big hit. Further, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state as compared with the non-time-saving game state.

In the modified example, the second time-saving gaming state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of operation n, the game substantially shifts to the high probability state of the big hit game. Moreover, in the said modification, the 3rd time shortening game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the time saving symbol is stopped, the game substantially shifts to the high probability state of the big hit game.

(43) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time reduction number N3 in the third time reduction game state may be changed according to the game state in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving gaming state, the time saving number N3 may be longer than when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving gaming state. Further, when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving gaming state, the time saving number N3 may be shorter than when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving gaming state.

(44) In each of the above-described modes, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the variation pattern between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state may be different. Further, the variation pattern between the first time reduction gaming state and the third time reduction gaming state may be different, or the variation pattern between the second time reduction gaming state and the third time reduction gaming state may be different.

(45) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n in the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is activated, a configuration may be configured to notify that fact. If the opening mode of the second starting port 14 does not change when the second time-saving game state is activated in the third time-saving gaming state, there is an inconvenience that the player does not know that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated. is assumed. According to the modification, the above inconvenience is suppressed. For example, by displaying the cumulative number of times m in the third time-shortened game state, the presence or absence of transition to the second time-shortened game state is substantially notified. It should be noted that the fact that the second short game state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, when the third time-saving game state ends, the configuration may be such that the fact that the second time-saving game state has been activated is notified.

(46) In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving gaming state may be different for each time-saving symbol. In the above configuration, the fun of the game is improved as compared with the configuration in which the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change according to the time-saving symbol.

(47) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the hold change effect is shown as an example of the specific effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the hold change effect. For example, a specific effect in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 emits light in a specific mode can be adopted. Further, a specific effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 can be adopted. For example, as a specific effect, an effect of displaying a character image called "super heat zone" can be considered. In the above configuration, the character image "extreme heat zone" is more likely to be displayed when the jackpot is pre-determined than when the loss is pre-determined.

(48) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pending change effect (specific effect) that can be determined may differ depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit or the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. For example, the final special mode of the reserved image GB that can be determined may be different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit or the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. In the above configuration, when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the reserved image GB may change to rainbow color, but when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the reserved image GB does not change to rainbow color. Conceivable.

(49) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time for displaying the right-handed start image GR can be appropriately changed. Further, the time for displaying the right-handed start image GR may be changed for each time-saving gaming state. For example, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a longer period of time in the second time-saving gaming state than in the first time-saving gaming state. Further, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a long period of time in the third time-shortened game state rather than the first time-shortened game state. In the above configuration, the right-handed start image GR may differ between the first time-saving gaming state and the other time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the right-handed start image GR may not be displayed when the first short-time game state starts.

(50) The time-saving game state of each of the above-described modes ends when the total number of times that the first special symbol display device 20 variablely displays and the number of times that the second special symbol display device 21 changes and displays reaches the time-saving number N. .. However, the trigger for ending the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, when the total number of times that the first special symbol display device 20 has changed and displayed and the number of times that the second special symbol display 21 has changed has reached 50, the number of times that the second special symbol display device 21 has changed and displayed has reached 50. The time-saving game state may be terminated at the first opportunity among the opportunity when the number reaches 5 times and the opportunity when the small hit is won once.

In addition, the end trigger may be different for each time-saving game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the second special symbol display is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed reaches 50 times. The device 21 ends when the number of times the variable display reaches 5 times or when the small hit is won once, and the first time the small hit is established. Further, in the second time-saving game state, the second special symbol display is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed reaches 500 times. It ends when the number of times the device 21 variablely displays reaches 20 times and when the small hit is won four times, which is the first time. Further, in the third time-saving game state, the second special symbol display is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed reaches 30 times. It is conceivable that the device 21 will end when the number of times the variable display reaches 6 times, or when the small hit is won 3 times, and the first time the small hit is established.

(51) In each of the above-described modes, the effect mode (background image GH, BGM, effect that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be appropriately changed. For example, the effect mode of the third time saving game state may be changed according to the time saving number N3 (100 times, 1000 times). Further, in the third time-saving game state in which the time reduction number N3 is 1000 times, the first 100 times production mode is shared with the production mode in the third time reduction game state in which the time reduction number N3 is 100 times, and in the 101st and subsequent games. The production mode may be changed. Further, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the effect mode of the first time-shortening game state and the effect mode of the third time-shortening game state (the effect mode before and after the change) are different.

(52) In each of the above-described embodiments, the remaining number image GF displaying the remaining number M in the time-saving gaming state may be omitted. Further, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in some time-saving game states (for example, the first time-saving game state), and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in some other time-saving game states (for example, the second time-saving game state). May be. Further, the remaining number image GF may be hidden in the early stage of the time saving game state, and the remaining number image GF may be displayed in the latter half of the time saving gaming state.

As a specific example of the above modification, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time saving game state and the third time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in the early stage of the second time saving game state, and the second time saving is performed. It is conceivable that the remaining number of times image GF is started to be displayed after the remaining number of times M2 in the gaming state is subtracted to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100). In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed even after the early stage of the second short game state.

(53) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the type of the time saving symbol can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of types of time-saving symbols that shift to the third time-saving gaming state of 1000 times and one or both of the time-saving symbols that shift to the third time-saving gaming state of 100 times may be provided. For example, in both the case where the first time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the case where the second time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the game shifts to the third time-saving gaming state 100 times.

(54) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the time-saving symbol may be different depending on the time-saving symbol, or may be common to the time-saving symbols. For example, when the time-saving symbol that shifts to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times is stopped and displayed, and when the time-saving symbol that shifts to the third time-saving gaming state of 100 times is stopped and displayed, the effect is stopped and displayed. The symbol GA may be common or different.

(55) In each of the above-described embodiments, the period during which the time-saving rush effect is executed is appropriately changed. For example, the fixed period when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is extended from the normal fixed period. Specifically, the time of the fixed period when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is extended to the same extent as the time of the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, the time saving rush effect when shifting to the third time saving game state may be executed in the fixed period when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, after the fixed period ends, the configuration may be such that the game shifts to the third time-shortened gaming state. Further, in the configuration in which the time saving rush effect is executed in the fixed period, when the configuration of shifting to the third time saving gaming state is adopted after the fixed period ends, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are displayed in the fixed period. It may or may not be displayed.

(56) In each of the above-described embodiments, the player may arbitrarily change (customize) the execution frequency of the specific effect. However, regardless of the execution frequency, it is preferable that the specific effect is executed less frequently in the above-mentioned limited period than in the period other than the limited period.

(57) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be configured so that the special symbols can be variablely displayed at the same time (in parallel). In the above configuration, the first reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, and the second reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. To.

In the above configuration, it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is added when the special symbol is stopped, as in the first embodiment described above. Further, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed in the nth game of the number of operations, and the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed in the n + 1th game. Further, it is assumed that the n + 1th game ends before the nth game (the variation display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variation display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number of times m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the end of the n + 1th game. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the player shifts to the second time-saving game state at the end of the n + 1th game.

It is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is added at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 is variablely displayed in the nth game of the number of operations, and the second special symbol display device 21 is variablely displayed in the n + 1th game. Further, it is assumed that the n + 1th game ends before the nth game (the variation display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variation display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number of times m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the start of the nth game. Therefore, a configuration that shifts to the second time-saving game state at the start of the nth game is preferable.

(58) In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the game with the nth operation number may be different from the variation pattern in other games. For example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol in the game of the nth operation number is determined, the image display device 31 is preferably notified that the game will shift to the second time-saving game state. Further, the determination period of the special symbol may be extended by the game having the nth operation number than the game before the nth operation number. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time saving rush effect when shifting to the second time saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the game of the nth operation number. Further, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state after the extended fixed period ends.

However, if the cumulative number of times m is initialized at the start of the big hit game and then the game with the nth operation number is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the game is changed, and the opportunity other than the start of the big hit game ( For example, when the cumulative number of times m is initialized by the operation of the clear button 30) and then the game with the nth operation number is executed, the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern in the game is not changed (does not change from the immediately preceding game) is preferable. Is. Further, if the cumulative number of times m is initialized at the start of the big hit game and then the game with the nth operation number is executed, the fixed period in the game is extended, and an opportunity other than the start of the big hit game (for example, clear). When the cumulative number of times m is initialized by the operation of the button 30) and then the game with the nth operation number is executed, it is preferable that the fixed period in the game is not extended. In the above configuration, since the manager of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variation time and the fixed period of the special symbol, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

(59) In each of the above-described embodiments, as a specific example of ending the time-saving gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends before the fixed period ends has been described. However, in the configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving gaming state may end before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop time processing (FIG. 18), the time saving end determination processing (S234 in the same figure) may be provided before step S233 for providing a fixed period. Specifically, a time reduction end determination process may be provided between step S233 and the third time reduction shift determination process (S232). Further, a time saving end determination process may be provided between the third time saving transition determination process and the second time saving transition determination process (S231), or a time saving end determination process may be provided immediately before the second time saving transition determination process. good.

Further, in the modification, the longest time for the opening / closing door 14b to be controlled by the operation mode Db is the fixed period of the game in which the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state) ends. A configuration longer than the time is preferred. In the above configuration, the opening / closing door 14b may not be in the operating state Db at the time when the non-time saving gaming state is started after the time saving gaming state is finished. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the situation where the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing at which the cumulative number of times command is transmitted may be at the start of the game or at the end of the game. Further, the cumulative number command may be transmitted in all games, or the cumulative number command may be transmitted in some games (for example, every 100 games).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a command indicating the remaining number of times "nm" up to the number of operations n may be transmitted to the effect control board 120 instead of the cumulative number of times command indicating the cumulative number of times m. Further, neither the command indicating the remaining number of operations up to the number of operations n nor the cumulative number of times command may be transmitted to the effect control board 120. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 counts the number of times a command (for example, a symbol confirmation command) transmitted when the special symbol is stopped (when the cumulative number of times m is added) is received, so that the sub CPU 121 has the current value of the cumulative number of times m. Alternatively, the remaining number of times up to the number of operations n can be notified.

(61) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration may be such that the transition to the dedicated effect mode (mode in which the dedicated effect can be executed) can be performed immediately after the end of the second time-saving game state. Further, in the above-mentioned dedicated production mode, a configuration in which a dedicated BGM is output is preferable. Similarly, the configuration may be such that the transition to the dedicated effect mode (mode in which the dedicated effect can be executed) can be performed immediately after the third time-saving game state is completed. Further, in the above-mentioned dedicated production mode, a configuration in which a dedicated BGM is output is preferable. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that after each time saving game state is completed, the mode shifts to a common special effect mode.

(62) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the second is even if the number of games in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state reaches the number of operations n. Does not shift to the time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state is completed, it is preferable to notify that the second time-saving gaming state has already ended. Specifically, it is conceivable that the cumulative number of times m is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state is completed. When the cumulative number of times m displayed is more than the numerical value "800", it is grasped that the second time saving game state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above-described embodiments, the specific effect (holding change effect, etc.) for notifying (suggesting) in advance that the game will shift to the second time-shortening gaming state is not executed according to the result of the prior determination. However, the configuration may be such that a specific effect for notifying (suggesting) in advance that the game will shift to the second time-saving gaming state is executed.

(64) In each of the above-described embodiments, the time-saving symbol may be effective in the time-saving gaming state. For example, it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second time saving game state. In the above case, both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be operated in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the opening mode of the opening / closing door 14b in the second time-saving gaming state is maintained.

(65) In each of the above-described embodiments, the second time is shortened when the special symbol is stopped during the period after the number of times the jackpot is determined not to be won in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability gaming state reaches the number of operations n. It has moved to the game state. However, if the number of times the jackpot is determined not to be won in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability gaming state reaches the number of operations n, the timing of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed.

For example, the number of times (cumulative number of times m) determined to be non-winning in the big hit may be updated (added or subtracted) immediately after the big hit lottery (immediately after the start of the game). With the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game. When adopting a configuration that shifts to the second time-shortening gaming state immediately after the start of the game, it is preferable that the right-handed lamp 28 lights up immediately after the start of the game and the above-mentioned advantageous period signal (external information signal) is turned on. Is. In the above configuration, the above-mentioned non-counting period is started when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game.

In the above modified example, it is preferable that the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect is executed when the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state immediately after the start of the game. Further, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, an image (for example, the above-mentioned right-handed image Gsy) for notifying that the game should be played by right-handed is started to be displayed, and the background image of the time-saving game state is displayed. A configuration that switches to GH is preferable. In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state is made before the finalization period of the special symbol ends, but the transition to the second time-shortening gaming state may be made after the finalization period ends.

(66) In each of the above-described embodiments, the remaining number M in the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game, but the remaining number M may be subtracted at the start of the game. In the above configuration, the time-saving game state ends at the start of the game. For example, the second short game state ends immediately after the 1000th game is started. In the above case, in the second short game state, when the 1000th game is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the above-mentioned counting period is started.

(67) In each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming state (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) may be provided, which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. However, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the time-saving symbol is invalid. That is, the time-saving symbol is effective only in the low-probability gaming state. Further, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the cumulative number of times m is not added (maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each of the above modes, a plurality of types of set values (for example, 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined as a big hit in the big hit lottery (for example, the probability of winning a big hit in a low probability gaming state) is the set value. A configuration that changes according to the situation may be adopted. However, with each set value, the probability of winning in the third time reduction is common. In addition, the probability of winning a small hit is common for each set value. The above setting values are changed by the setting change process executed in response to the setting change operation of the administrator of the gaming machine 1.

In the above modification, the number of operations n in which the second time-saving gaming state is activated is common to each set value. Specifically, when the probability of winning a big hit in a low-probability gaming state is "ML" (0 <M <1), the number of operations n for all set values is in the range "2.5 / ML ≦ n ≦". The configuration included in "3.0 / ML" is suitable.

In the above modification, the number of games in the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of time-saving games N) is preferably configured to be common to all the set values. Specifically, the time reduction number N1 in the first time reduction game state is common to all the set values, the time reduction number N2 in the second time reduction game state is common to all the set values, and the time reduction in the third time reduction game state. It is preferable that the number of times N3 is common to all the set values. Further, when the minimum jackpot probability among the jackpot probabilities "ML" in the low probability gaming state of each set value is "MLmim" (the jackpot probability of the set value "1"), the time reduction number N2 is the numerical value "3. It is preferable that the time reduction frequency N3 is 8 / MLmim or less and the numerical value “3.8 / MLmim” or less.

(69) In each of the above-described embodiments, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized by the set value change process by changing the set value and the clear operation process by operating the clear button 30, and the dedicated operation unit (hereinafter, “cumulative clear”) is used. The cumulative number of times m may be initialized when the "button") is operated.

(70) In each of the above-described embodiments, the cumulative number of times m may not be initialized in the clear operation process, and the cumulative number of times m may be initialized in the above-mentioned set value change process. Further, the cumulative number of times m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the normal mode, and the cumulative number of times m may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the special mode. For example, when the clear button 30 is operated once, the predetermined information is initialized, but the cumulative number of times m is not initialized, and when the clear button 30 is continuously operated twice, the predetermined information and the cumulative number of times m are initialized. It is conceivable that both of them are initialized.

(71) In each of the above-described embodiments, an effect suggesting a set value may be executed. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which an effect suggesting a set value is executed when the time-saving game state ends. However, if the game shifts to the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states and the big hit is not won in the second time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that the winning probability of the big hit is low. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, the effect suggesting the set value is executed, and when the second time-shortened game state ends, the effect suggesting the set value is not executed. Is suitable.

(72) In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state of each of the above-described modes, a plurality of types of effect symbols GAx may be displayed according to the effect mode in which the game is advanced or the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, a plurality of types of effect symbols GAy may be displayed according to the effect mode in which the game is advanced or the background image GH.

Further, different production symbols GAy may be displayed for each of the first time-shortening game state, the second time-shortening game state, and the third time-shortening game state. Specifically, the effect symbol GAy common to the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is displayed, and the effect symbol GAy different from the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state in the third time-shortened game state is displayed. May be displayed. In addition, the effect symbol GAy common to the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state is displayed, and the effect symbol GAy different from the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state is displayed in the first time-shortened game state. It may be that. Further, the effect symbol GAy common to the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state is displayed, and the effect symbol GAy different from the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state is displayed in the second time-shortened game state. It may be that.

(73) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, it is assumed that the number of holdings at the time of shifting to the second short-time game state is a numerical value "0". That is, it is assumed that the state shifts to the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) immediately after the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. In the modification, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed in the above-mentioned waiting state for customers. Further, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ indicating the character string "0 more times" is displayed in the above-mentioned waiting state for customers.

In the modified example, when the start winning is won in the above-mentioned customer waiting state and the first game in the second short-time game state is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is continuously lit in the game as well, and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed. It will be displayed continuously. However, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ is hidden in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Further, in the modified example, the time saving rush effect is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after the transition to the second time saving game state, and then the time saving rushing effect is executed in the first game of the second time saving game state.

On the other hand, if the number of holdings is a numerical value "1" or more at the time of shifting to the second time-shortened gaming state, in the modified example, immediately after shifting to the second time-shortened gaming state (in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state). ), The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on, the right-handed image Gsy is displayed, the emphasized image GZ is hidden, and the time-saving rush effect is executed. In the above modified example, the time saving rush effect may be executed in the customer waiting state. Further, the game count image GE may be displayed over the above-mentioned customer waiting state, and the game count image GE may be hidden in the first game in the second time-saving game state.

(74) In each of the above-described embodiments, the magnitude relationship between the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-shortened gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-shortened gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-shortened gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal to each other. Further, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal to each other. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, the remaining number of times M1 may be equal to the remaining number of times M3, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the "first information J1" is exemplified as the "first information relating to the execution of the special game specified by the prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, the "winning information (starting prize designation command) generated when a random value for determining a special symbol of a big hit is acquired" in the first embodiment is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Further, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, "second information J2" is exemplified as "second information relating to the transition to the second gaming state specified by the prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, when the random value for determining the special symbol of the loss is acquired for the cumulative number of times m, it becomes possible to shift to the second time saving game state (second game state). Therefore, the "winning information (starting winning designation command) generated when the random value for determining the special symbol of loss is acquired" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example in which the present invention is adopted for a pachinko machine is shown, but the present invention may be adopted for a pachi-slot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an acquisition means (S139 in FIG. 30) for acquiring determination information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and a determination means (S139 in FIG. 30) for determining whether or not a special game is appropriate based on the determination information when the determination condition is satisfied. In S207) of FIG. 33), when the number of times that the special game is determined not to be won reaches a predetermined specific number of times, after that, the second game state in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state can be started. Means (S244 in FIG. 35) and an image display means (image display device 31) capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shield image that shields the background image to make it difficult to see according to the progress of the game. , And the background image includes a first background image (GHx) displayed in the first gaming state and a second background image (GHw, GHz) displayed in the second gaming state, and is an image display means. Makes the first background image difficult to see by the shielded image when the number of times determined to be non-winning in the special game reaches a predetermined specific number of times, and then hides the shielded image. The second background image is visually displayed, and at the start of the second gaming state, the start notification image for notifying the start of the second gaming state can be displayed at any time before or after the display of the shield image (FIG. 16). reference).

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started after the number of times of determination, which is the number of times that the special game is determined not to be won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, the fun of the opportunity to start the second gaming state is improved as compared with the configuration in which the second gaming state is not started by the trigger. Further, according to the shielded image of the present invention, there is an advantage that it is possible to emphasize that the first gaming state has ended (the second time-saving gaming state has started).

1 ... Game machine, 10 ... Game board, 13 ... 1st start port, 14 ... 2nd start port, 31 ... Image display device, 110 ... Main control board, 111 ... Main CPU, 112 ... Main ROM, 113 ... Main RAM , 120 ... Production control board, 121 ... Sub CPU, 122 ... Sub ROM, 123 ... Sub RAM, 140 ... Lamp control board, 150 ... Image control board, 151 ... Host CPU, 152 ... Host RAM, 152 ... Host ROM.

Claims (1)

When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition means for acquiring the judgment information and
A determination means for determining the success or failure of a special game based on the determination information based on the establishment of the determination condition,
When the number of times that the special game is determined not to be won reaches a predetermined specific number of times, a start means capable of starting a second game state in which the acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state, and a start means.
It is provided with an image display means capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shield image that shields the background image to make it difficult to see according to the progress of the game.
The background image is
The first background image displayed in the first gaming state and the second background image displayed in the second gaming state are included.
The image display means is
When the number of times determined to be non-winning in the special game reaches a predetermined specific number of times, the first background image is made difficult to see by the shielded image, and then the shielded image is hidden. The second background image is displayed so as to be visible.
A gaming machine capable of displaying a start notification image for notifying the start of the second gaming state at any time before or after the display of the shielded image at the start of the second gaming state.

Images